Home

QX Hawk Industrial Imager User`s Manual

1. Dec Hex Mne Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch 00 00 NUL 64 40 96 60 01 01 SOH 65 41 A 97 61 a 02 02 STX 66 42 B 98 62 b 03 03 ETX C 99 63 C 04 04 EOT D 100 64 d 05 05 ENQ E 101 65 e 06 06 ACK F 102 66 f 07 07 BEL G 103 67 g 08 08 BS H 104 68 h 09 09 HT 105 69 i 10 OA LF J 106 6A j 11 0B VT K 107 6B k 12 OC FF L 108 6C 13 OD CR M 109 6D m 14 OE SO N 110 6E n 15 OF SI O 111 6F O 16 10 DLE 0 P 112 70 p 17 11 DC1 1 Q 113 71 q 18 12 DC2 2 R 114 72 r 19 13 DC3 3 S 115 13 S 20 14 DC4 4 T 116 74 t 21 15 NAK 5 U 117 15 u 22 16 SYN 6 V 118 76 V 23 17 ETB T W 119 TT W 24 18 CAN 8 X 120 78 x 25 19 EM 9 Y 121 19 y 26 1A SUB Z 122 TA Z 27 1B ESC 123 7B 28 1C FS 124 TC 29 1D GS 125 7D 30 1E RS ns 126 TE 31 1F US 127 TF D QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 75 Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP When using Ethernet to deploy QX Hawks in an application the host computer must be in the same IP range as the devices Network settings are accessible in Windows from the Control Panel The steps below show how TCP IP settings can be configured 1 From the Windows Start Menu open Control Panel and double click Network Connections amp Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help X B Search Folders FH Address ea Control Panel Name
2. tl Power Supply axl Host a or PLC Qx 1 To gt L CI gt D gt oxn i is aai To Power Supply To Power i QX 1 Multidrop Supply Concentrator Host or PLC QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 3 11 Application Examples Ethernet TCP IP Ethernet TCP IP is the standard Ethernet interface used to connect multiple locations in a network such as computers in an office network It can also be used to network other communications devices such as imagers and PLCs on a factory floor The highlighted areas below demonstrate how an Ethernet daisy chain can be arranged Ethernet enabled imagers can also be set up in standalone configurations or multiple Ethernet enabled imagers along a production or packaging line can be connected to Ethernet A we lt To Power Supply QX To Host 1 Ethernet J4 oe Zr im A ee ae ol Supply xz lt HLS HL H To Power QX 1 Multidrop Supply Concentrator Host or PLC Le 3 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual es 4 Setup Contents NS Orne oozed au tena ceea seen EE ae esac ou eset EE AEEA E E aesesees essen eteneseavineteseee 4 2 AEA OU cata athe eter cesses te acini ec pase E cme daw nae aap E ee ect e ee 4 11 521 1 E 9 Ree E ree Oe ee ene E ee ee ae ene ee Reena ae ee oe S 4 14 Window of INTereS t ssiri nanie skee RO ae dais aa bene tnacstltee sna dstaesheadstiedeeceeays 4 15 Coniguraton EAA ASS scorns e n aier ara ecu EA
3. Command Response from Imager to Host TX to host STX preamble COMMAND RESPONSE DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble command ending angle bracket gt or timeout waiting for more data are detected depending on what is enabled As with Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt the imager can optionally perform the REQ and RES event sequences in ACK NAK mode If the sender does not receive an ACK or NAK it will send REQ to request such a response if enabled When the sender receives an ACK too many NAKs or times out if already enabled it will send a RES if enabled to terminate the transaction Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix F for sample ACK NAK communication scenarios QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 25 Communication Polling Mode Options These parameters only take effect for Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the ACK NAK Options lt K147 gt The values of protocol characters can be changed but the protocol events cannot be disabled The polling mode address is configured in the lt K140 gt command To enable true multidrop protocol the RS422 485 port must be enabled lt K102 1 gt in order to turn the transmitter on and off If RS 232 is enabled instead of RS422 485 lt K102 0 gt then Polling Mode will operate as a Point to Point polling protocol
4. Firmware Checksum lt la gt Display Application Code Code Checksum lt ld gt Display DSP Code Checksum lt rb key gt Roll Back Application Code lt gt Imager Status Request lt K gt All Status Request lt K gt All Descriptor Request imager Status lt K gt All Range Request lt Knnn gt Single Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Request lt Knnn gt Single Range Request lt Knnnd gt Single Command Default lt LEARN gt Initiate Learn Operation Learn lt UNLEARN gt Initiate Unlearn Operation lt LEARN gt Display Learn Status lt G gt Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index 1 Master Database lt Gn gt Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status lt C gt Enter Decodes Second Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Decode Percent Test lt J gt Exit Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests Reboot System lt reboot gt Cold Boot System from Boot Code Static Validation lt VAL gt Perform Static Validation of Data Matrix Symbol lt 11 gt Activate Targeting System Targeting l lt 10 gt De activate Targeting System Temperature lt TEMP gt Display Image Sensor Temperature Y Modem Transfer a ae file Y Modem Upload a lt dy key gt Y Modem Download Code QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 65 Protocol Commands Appendix F Protocol Commands Communication Protocol Command Table Control Characters fancenic Aiea ed on menu
5. Match The green LEDs will flash when a match condition is met If multisymbol is enabled then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match If matchcode is disabled then this mode will activate the LEDs on a good read Mismatch Same as Match except that LEDs will illuminate on a mismatch Strobe The green flash will be used as an illumination strobe for image capture If it is required that the green flood is the only illumination for image capture then the internal illumination LED s can be disabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 99 I O Parameters Targeting Qutpuk Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read ELE a Always One v Green Flash Duration Always Off Beeper On only when Hot imn Read Cycle LED Configuration On only when in Read Cycle ISQJIEC 16022 Grade Always On Always Off The targeting LEDs remain off On Only When Not In Read Cycle The targeting LEDs illuminate while the imager is not in a read cycle When a read cycle is entered the targeting LEDs will turn off they will come back on upon exiting On Only When In Read Cycle The targeting LEDs illuminate upon entering a read cycle and will turn off upon exiting the read cycle Always On The targeting LEDs are always illuminated Green Flash Duration Provides visual verification that a good read has occurred When a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the time set in the
6. P E E Find fac 2 Press Enter The first instance of ABC will be highlighted in the Terminal window 3 Click the Find button to the left of the text field to locate additional instances of ABC QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 6 3 Send Send The Send function allows the user to enter serial commands and then send them to the imager 1 Type the command into the Send box LI La ua Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities send 2 Press Enter 3 Click the Send button to the left of the text field to send the command additional times 6 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Terminal Macros Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar edited in a separate window and executed by clicking on the macro name Default Macros Add Macro art umber Checksum Disable Scanning Enable Scanning Exit Read Cycle For Help press Fl Click on the first arrow here to see Add Click on Next Macro or Default Macros Click on subsequent Row to see When macros are defaulted the entire arrows to edit macros the next row macro set is restored to the original macro of macros commands Click a macro button to execute it in the Terminal If the macro is a command it is sent to the imager at the same time that it is displayed Editing a Macro Click the arrow next to any macro and select Edit to display the following dialog Macro Entry Macro Nam
7. Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Ethernet Enables or disables Ethernet connectivity in the imager Parameters Important For further information about setting up TCP IP with a PC see Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Qukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCF Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Enabled 192 166 0 100 eco eo U0 0 0 0 0 DHCP 001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 2003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 13 Communication IP Address Enter the IP address of the imager in this field Ethernet Foabled Subnet 295 255 00 ateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP TEF Port 1 O01 Symbol Data Gukpuk Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TEF Port 2 z003 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command 5 14 QX Hawk
8. Pulse width Match or Good Read Output Mode Mismatch Trend Analysis No Read Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Diagnostics Diagnostic Waring ln Read Cycle Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled 5 144 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the imager is in a read cycle QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 145 I O Parameters Output St
9. Test Read Rate Step 9 Test Read Rate Read Rate indicates the number of successful decodes per second achieved by the imager Test Read Rate by ESP 1 Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test Decodes per Second Contrast If a symbol has been successfully decoded its data and related information will be presented in the field below the image display window While the symbol is being decoded the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the top of the unit 2 Click the Stop button to end the Read Rate test Note Read rate can also be tested using the Read Rate interface in Utilities Test Read Rate by EZ Button 1 To start the Read Rate test hold down the EZ Button about three seconds until you hear three short beeps The 20 40 and 60 LEDs will illuminate While the symbol is being decoded the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the top of the unit 80 These LEDs represent the 60 percentage of Good Reads 40 per images captured 2 To end the Read Rate test press the EZ Button and quickly release Test Read Rate by Serial Command You can also start a test with the lt C gt or lt Cp gt command and end it with the lt J gt command 1 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 10 Configure the Imager Click the App Mode button to make configuration changes to the image
10. 1 Left click on the to expand the desired tree 2 Double click on the Parameters ESP Values Communications RS232 A RS232 B Enabled RS422 Disabled Ethernet Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled maa Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters Postamble Enabled desired parameter and click once in the selection box to view options 3 Place the cursor in the selection box scroll down to the setting you want to change and click once on the setting Saving Option 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete the selection S 5 Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the imager e Send No Save Changes will be lost when power is re applied to the imager e Send and Save This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the imager for power on 1 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual E 2 Using ESP Contents EZ NOUE eee Re ee ee ee eee ee ee 2 2 API NOOO emerge RE a rene eee eee et ee ae ee ee ee eee E eee 2 3 Kenn OOD AN ee tecoaceseecaecccacsecascecacancetameeceaundens stan uneteaecetesebssesereaspeateceeseceasdaeateeesaneeasmuesgncicscencaucevatas 2 4 Navigaung in E SP aseene aan nE N REE aE AS 2 15 Send Receive Options a cecc cancascccasacecesenccantedan cans sacascevedsnpanaccesnneacaseacentenssisacuncecunceranesacee
11. Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Options 1 to 366 A 46 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Calibration Options Appendices lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type window of interest framing window of interest margin gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper Quality Output lt K702 status gt lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbol data gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt Global Symbol Quality Output lt K708 quality output separator output mode gt ISO IEC 16022 Parameters lt K709 symbo contrast print growth axial non uniformity unused ECC gt Data Matrix Grading lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Frame Information lt K734 output frame
12. Green Flash Mode Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read we Targeting Disabled Green Flash Duration Good Read Beeper Static Presentation Match Mismatch ISQUIEC 16022 Grade C trobe LED Configuration Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred An array of green LEDs in the front of the imager can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions Disabled Green flash LEDs are disabled Good Read Green flash LEDs will flash when a good read condition is met or when Matchcode is enabled and a match occurs 5 98 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Static Presentation Static Presentation Mode is used in conjunction with Continuous Read mode When operating in Static Presentation Mode the red LEDs will illuminate while the imager is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read mode When a symbol is placed in the field of view and a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols Note If Static Presentation Mode is selected but the imager is not in Continuous Read the Green Flash will not occur To use Static Presentation 1 Enable Continuous Read 2 Select the number of symbols 3 Enable Static Presentation in Green Flash Mode 4 Select the read time in Green Flash Duration
13. Note When to Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 43 Read Cycle Continuous Read 1 Output Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand In Continuous Read 1 Output the imager self triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs lf End of Read Cycle Mode is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn t change the output is repeated at the end of each timeout period For example if Timeout is set to one second the imager sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as the symbol remains in the field of view lf End of Read Cycle Mode is set to New Trigger the imager will send the current symbol data immediately but only once A new symbol appearing in the imager s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol Caution In automated environments Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is typically no reliable way to verify that a symbol was missed Note If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration 5 44 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual
14. as follows lt Knumeric character data data etc gt lt initializing command gt An initializing command lt Z gt or lt A gt may follow the command e lt Z gt initializes the imager s memory and saves for power on e lt A gt initializes the imager s memory but does not save for power on For example to enable UPC and save the change for power on send lt K473 1 gt lt Z gt To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power on send lt K100 3 gt lt A gt Serial Configuration Command Conventions e All command fields except the last must be followed by a comma without a space e NULL cannot be used The characters lt gt and can be used but only if entered as hex pairs see ASCII Character Entry Modifier e All fields preceding a modified field must be included e If there is no change in preceding fields then commas alone can be entered in these fields For example if only the last field in the following command is changing lt K100 4 7 0 0 gt can be entered as lt K100 0 gt e All fields following a modified field can be omitted For example to change Baud Rate only send lt K100 3 gt A 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Concatenating Configuration Commands Commands can be concatenated added together in a single string For example lt K145 1 gt lt K220 1 gt lt K450 7 gt lt A gt enables LRC sets End of Read Cycle mode to New Trigger en
15. is used for most applications The other modes are reserved for future feature enhancements For Mode4 the internal illumination is always off similar to configuration setting O Always Off EE Illumination Type Bright Field Brightness of B right Field Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Internal off Brightness Configures the amount of illumination output from the unit s built in lighting E Illumination Type Bright Field Brightness High kal Medium High QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 5 Camera Setup Focus Distance Provides focal distance adjustment for the camera When Distance units is set to millimeters the Focal Distance parameter has a range of 25 to 4000 Any value outside this range will be rejected When Distance units is set to 1 100 inch Focal Distance is limited to a range of 100 to 4000 If the user attempts to set the Focal distance to less than 100 1 inch the parameter will be set to 100 When a lens is changed on the QX Hawk the user can improve the accuracy of the Focal Distance parameter by using the lt OPTIC gt command Even after running lt OPTIC gt the system distance accuracy is approximate The command gives reasonable step sizes as apposed to completely unknown magnitudes but it is not expected that 2 units will exhibit the same exact focus for a given setting eFocus Distance 25 4000 mm Distance Units Millimeters imm L
16. s Manual Parameters Sequence Step When the master symbol is sequenced incremented decremented Sequence Step defines the magnitude of change Matchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 Match Length 1 Wild Card T Seguence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 32768 Mew Master Pin Disabled New Master Pin lf Matchcode and New Master Pin are enabled and the new master pin is momentarily connected to ground must be held low for a minimum of 10 ms master symbol information will be loaded into the database based on the next read cycle that achieves a Good Read starting with Index 1 The Master Database will be loaded with all symbols decoded in the read cycle as long as it does not exceed the Master Symbol Database Size parameter Makchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 Match Length 1 Wild Card r Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Mew Master Pin Disabled DO ijsabled Enabled New Master Load Status The new master status responds with the number of the next master position to be loaded where 0 represents idle or no master to be loaded Example f the user has the Master Symbol Database Size set to 1 and then either sends a lt G gt or toggles an active New Master Pin the state will be 1 and prior to reading and ef
17. s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibrate Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Target System When the imager reaches this position the targeting pattern appears The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 111 I O Parameters Two Beeps Hold down button until two quick beeps are heard and the 20 and 40 LEDs illuminate E Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Load Config DB Enabled Save For Power on Disabled Single Beep Target System Calibrate ka Three Beeps Four Beeps Calibrate Save for Power on Load New Master Target System Bar Code Configuration Disabl
18. 1 to 2710 Decode at End of Read Cycle PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 43 Serial Commands Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 10 Options 1 to 16 Minimum Bars Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 4 Options 1 to 16 Bar Width Status Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Mixed Options 0 Mixed 1 All Narrow 2 All Wide 3 Fixed Threshold Direction Pharma
19. ACK BEL es HT LE f VT Click Delete to remove characters 5 90 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbology Identifier Symbology Identifier is a standard prefix set of characters that identifies the symbol type When enabled the imager analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data e closed bracket character indicating the presence of a symbology identifier e A C E F GI1 L e orp e A Code 39 C Code 128 E UPC EAN F Codabar G Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 L PDF417 and MicroPDF417 e GS1 DataBar RSS p Pharmacode e Modifier Example C indicates a Code 128 symbol Symbalogy Identifier Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled When set to Disabled symbol data output does not contain Symbology Identifier information Enabled When set to Enabled symbol data output contains a Symbology Identifier sequence QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 91 Symbologies Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 e For Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 the modifier indicates Check Character and Check Character Output status e For Code 39 only Full ASCII must be enabled to see modifiers 4 5 and 7 Check Moder hater Sartor a oss Sn 0 Disabled N A No 1 Enabled Enabled No 3 Enabled Disabled No 4 Disabled N A Yes 5 Enabled Enabled Yes T Enabled Disabled
20. End Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests Sending lt J gt ends both the Percent test and the Decodes Second test QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 5 Counters Counters Utilities Click the Utilities button and then the Counters tab to display the Counters view Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65535 After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65535 an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000 To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the rollover has occurred add 65536 per each rollover the imager does not keep track of the number of rollovers to the current count Note All counter values will be lost if power is cycled or if the imager receives a Reset or Save command Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set the counter to zero Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Tesere ee ee All and Clear All buttons Benen left of each item ee rey eos cee S Clear All Trigger Good Read No Read and Mismatch counters can be requested and cleared simultaneously Request or individually Request and Clear buttons to the QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Counters Serial Utility Commands No Read Counter sending lt N gt displays the total number of no reads that h
21. External Data System Data 4 Destination Data Ambles needed Preamble needed O 5 30 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Half Duplex Mode When Half Duplex Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Enabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Enabled Echo to Source Fixed to Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Disabled Output at ETX Fixed to Disabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Disabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation e Source Port data is not echoed back to itself e Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode e Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received e Source Port data is sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble e Symbol data is sent to the Source Port and the Destination Port at the same time and conforms to the communication parameters e Destination Port data is echoed to the Source Port in an un polled mode Scanner Other Devices le j k External Data 5System Data 4 Destination Data Unpolled mode Ambles needed e QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 31 Communication
22. Fax 65 6846 4641 ii QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Introduction Table of Contents Chapter 1 Quick Start Step 1 Check Hardware cccccccccseecccceeeeecseeeceseeeseeeeseeeeseneeeeseeeees 1 2 Step 2 Connect the SySteM cccccccssssecceesseeececeeeeeesseeseeessaseeeeseaeeees 1 3 Step 3 Position the IMAGE cccceccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeesaeeees 1 4 Step 4 Install ESP ccc cccccecseeeecesseeceeseecesseeeccaeeesessaecesseeseeseeseaseeess 1 5 Step 5 Select Model cceeccccecccceeececceeeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeeees 1 6 Step 0 CONNEC ies cshcs esate e a e e AEA TETES 1 7 Step 7 Locate Symbol ccccccssececcccsseeecceseeececeueeeecseegeeeecsuseeeessaeeees 1 9 Step 8 Calibr te a is inei sntadsiGedasadedeid asec euadbteeaas 1 11 Step 9 Test Read Rate tiensscsewsstecesedaccncasaetasiccaneitadedaaseatieiacaneesasedeeedes 1 12 Step 10 Configure the Imager ccccceceeccssseeeecceeseeecseeeeeeeeseaeeeeessuees 1 13 Step 11 Save CHANGES ccccccccsssececcceeeeeccceegeeecseseeeeseeseeeessenseeeeseas 1 14 Chapter 2 Using ESP BZ WO cession E E netted ou 2 2 ADP MOG G insna net ee eee ea eR een eee eee 2 3 Menu TOODA a sec setecis ie eee a a a aA aE Geeta 2 4 Navigating IM ESP checdicdcc iera i a a a a eet 2 15 SeNG RECCIVE OPUONS sissors a a aaa a a a 2 16 Chapter 3 Hardware Integration 0 01a 216 3 a aaee E EE 3 2 COS
23. Full Duplex Mode When Full Duplex Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Disabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Disabled Echo to Source Fixed to Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Disabled Output at ETX Fixed to Disabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Disabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation e Source Port data is not echoed back to itself e Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode e Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received e Source Port data is always sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble e Symbol data is not sent to the Source Port e Destination port data is echoed to the source port in an un polled mode Scanner External Data System Data 4 Destination Data Unpolled mode Ambles needed Custom Mode Custom allows for user defined communication Ambles to Source Echo to Source Output at End of Read Cycle Output at ETX Output at Timeout 5 32 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Destination Port Determines the port to which data will be sent External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS232 AR Ambles to Sou
24. No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the imager will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 2 Parameters Gukput On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width s00 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read nE Ok Wet Mumber to Output On Ho Bead Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers 5 138 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or
25. Number of Frames mode with a Frame Count 1 Time The imager will load the next entry from the database to current after a defined time interval The timer will start upon use of a database entry In other words if the timer expires during a capture event the timer will not start again until the database entry has been incremented and the new entry has been loaded to current Number of Image Frames Database index is incremented after the specified number of image frames have been captured Frame Count Time Indicates the Number of Frames that will occur or the amount of Time that is required before the imager will load the next database configuration Timer resolution is 1ms Image Process Looping This feature is useful for processing a captured image frame multiple times with different Image Process Decode parameters Disabled An image is captured for every database configuration regardless if a camera setting has been modified QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 21 Configuration Database Enabled When a database configuration is loaded to current and the Camera settings have not changed from last capture event a new image is not captured But rather the last image frame that was captured is re processed with the new Image Processing Decode configuration The one exception is with the 1st database index a new image is always captured when the 1st database configuration is used When a
26. Parameters External Level Initiate Read Cycle lt q Object 1 moving in front of the T arl ea change in the trigger state guec ED which initiates the read cycle End Read Cycle D e The same object moving out of t the detector beam causes Object 5 detector another change in the trigger nar state which ends the read cycle This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the imager spends reading each object is not predictable It also allows the user to determine if a No Read has occurred External Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received The read cycle persists until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Negative or Positive that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and the falling edge Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object This applies both to External Level and External Edge External Edge Initiate Read Cycle p 7 al Object 1 moving in front of the detector beam causes a change in s the trigger state which initiates the Object read cycle detector D Initiate Secon
27. The Report tab allows the user to initiate Data Matrix Grading and to generate and save grading reports To save the report as a PDF file an HTML file a CSV file or an RTF file click the Save Report button Reports appear in the viewing area underneath the Data Matrix Grading and Save Report buttons ESE ESP Untitled Fie Model Options Connect View Help amp Ez Mode BEE ee B 9 i lt gt E Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Communication Read Cycle Symbologies Ic Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics li E Farameters Ef Symbol Quality El Global Total Read Time Symbol Quality Separator Output Mode Data Matrix E ISGIEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Print Growth Axial Non uniForrmity Unused ECC El Grading Percent Cell Damage Capture Time Locate Time ESP Values Disabled SP Grade Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Report Locate Preferences Show Tree Control Data Matrix Grading Save Report See the reader s manual for information regarding these parameters The Symbol Quality interface is divided into three sections Report Locate and Preferences The imager s field of view is shown here When grading is completed the initial report is also shown in this viewing area aim i S Ox Hawwk 1 115 2K Lit Ox H
28. a My Documents fe My Computer GB 344 Floppy tA Se Local Disk ic mo gt 4 Connect to Readers via TCP IP When enabled shows the TCP IP Connection Wizard by default IP Address 162 148 88 5 C RS 232 Ethemet TCP Port 1 2001 zal Use Default Storage Location When enabled automatically stores data in ESP s Application Data folder 2 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Document Memo The information entered in the Document Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu Insert up to 250 characters to describe this document Type document specific information here Options Preferences EES Type document specific information here Model Memo Model Memo Similar to Document Memo the information entered in the Model Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the Options menu Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created Insert up to 250 characters to describe this model Type model epecific information here Options Preferences Document Memo siete Meno ae Type model specific information here Note Memos must be saved in a esp file to make them available in the next session If the current session is not saved any memos that have been entered during the sessio
29. a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Serial Data and Edge Serial Data and Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be triggered manually An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the auxiliary port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the imager to the host In this mode the imager accepts either a serial ASCII character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge Used to ignore accidental triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the leading edge is filtered such that on an active edge the state must be held interrupted for the trigger filter duration before a trigger will occur Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 0 010048 Seconds Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed 5 46 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Trailing Edge Used to ignore ac
30. a request for the SafeMode part number is sent the imager returns lt s 35 XXXXXX RR gt 7 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Request Checksum Send a request to the imager for application code or DSP code checksums 1 Click the Firmware tab Utilities 2 Select App Code or DSP Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Checksum button 3 Click the Request Checksum button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right Firmware Yertication Select the firmware App Code DSP Code mmo E Ca J Request Checksum by Serial Command e When lt gt a request for all available firmware checksums is sent the imager returns lt la APP_CHECKSUM gt lt d DSP_CHECKSUM gt e When lt a gt a request for the application code checksum is sent the imager returns lt la APP_CHECKSUM gt e When lt d gt a request for the DSP code checksum is sent the imager returns lt d DSP_CHECKSUM gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 19 Firmware Request Build Number by Serial Command Note X base part number R revision number B build number e When lt gt a request for all part numbers is sent the imager returns lt a 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt lt b 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt lt d 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt lt k 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt a gt a request for the application code build number is sent the imager returns lt
31. 1 Formatted output status for symbol 1 2 Formatted output status for symbol 2 10 Formatted output status for symbol 10 Status Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Assign parameters to specified symbol Output Format Status Serial Cmd lt K743 output format status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Filter Configuration Filter Number Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Options 1 to 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 61 Serial Commands Symbology Type Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Options 0 Any type 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Code 39 3 Code 128 4 Codabar 5 UPC 6 PDF417 7 EAN 128 8 Code 93 9 Pharmacode 10 GS1 DataBar RSS 12 Composite Length Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Options 0 to 128 Wildcard Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0x2A Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Placeholder Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbol
32. 1 Output and Serial Data and Edge It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted It assures that a read cycle ends before the next symbol appears giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host Timeout ends the read cycle causing the imager to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses times out if When to Output Symbol Data is set to End of Read Cycle Ifin Continuous Read 1 Output a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge enabled a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host With External Level enabled the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger occurs or a timeout occurs The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger 5 52 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters New Trigger New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the imager at irregular intervals not timing dependent New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge enabled an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycl
33. 1 Parameters Output On Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Mismatch or No Read Options 0 Mismatch or No Read 1 Match or Good Read 2 Mismatch 3 No Read 4 Trend Analysis 5 Validation 6 Diagnostic Warning 7 In Read Cycle 8 Read Cycle Data Valid Output State Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 0 Normally Open Options 0 Normally Open 1 Normally Closed Pulse Width Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 500 Options 1 to 65535 in 1 ms increments Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 0 Pulse Options 0 Pulse 1 Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin 2 Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition 3 Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Output 2 Parameters Serial Cmd lt K811 output on output state pulse width outout mode gt Output 3 Parameters Serial Cmd lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt A 54 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Matchcode Matchcode lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Master Symbol Database Size lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Master Symbol lt K231 index master symbol data gt M
34. Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger D 0 65535 5 150 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 E Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Frink Growth Disabled Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled Output on Unused ECC Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade Z Print Growth Threshold Grade Z Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Grade Z Unused ECC Threshold Grade Z Output on Symbol Contrast The symbol contrast is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled ka Disabled Enabled Output on Print Growth The print growth is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Print Growth Disabled w izabled Enabled Output on Axial Non Uniformity The axial non uniformity is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Axial Mon unirormity Disabled al Djs
35. B Ethernet M12 8 pin Socket A 7 Electrical Specifications QX 1 Connectors Connector T on the QX 1 Interface Device is the Trigger connector Connectors 1 2 and 3 can be used to bus power and data as required by the application The connectors on the QX 1 interface device physically mirror those on the QX Hawk imager but they do not have explicit pin assignments The QX 1 connectors take on the communications and power roles that are assigned to them Trigger w amp 2 Trigger New Master Input 1 Common by 10 28V QX 1 Trigger Connector 4 pin Socket _s 10 28V Trigger Input 1 Common New Master Ground A Oo N Trigger Power Switch COMM I 0 POWER TRIGGER Trigger Switch QX 1 Wiring Diagram Connectors 1 and 3 are 12 pin plugs and Connector 2 is a 12 pin schprocket All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed The simple diagram above also shown on the base of the QxX 1 illustrates how power communications I O and trigger signal can be routed through the QX 1 device Power can be bussed between imagers and interface devices At each location on a network where a new power supply is added the Power switch on the QX 1 can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connect
36. Because the start and stop characters are included as part of the data the characters must be included as part of the length in a fixed length mode of operation Start and Stop Output Status Enabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 75 Symbologies Large Intercharacter Gap When disabled the spaces between characters or the intercharacter gap are ignored during the decode process Note If the intercharacter space is large enough to be considered a margin the symbol will not decode regardless of this parameter s setting Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Disabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled the imager will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the imager will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn t match the fixed length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Symbol Length This is the value against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared Symbol Length 1 64 Check Character Type When disabled the imager will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols When set to Mod 16 the imager will perform a modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to NW 7 the imager will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check chara
37. Beeps Three Beeps and Four Beeps selectable by the length of time the button is held down and indicated by one two three and four beeps in succession Each position can be programmed for any of eight EZ Button Modes 5 108 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters EZ Button Status ARE Button Enabled Disabled Enabled Trigger Unlatch Outputs Parameter switch Disabled When set to Disabled the EZ Button does not function Enabled When selected the EZ Button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the EZ Button Modes command Trigger When selected the EZ Button acts as a trigger for the imager to start and end read cycles All other button operations are inactive In External The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ Button is pressed unless a Level timeout occurs and End of Read Cycle Mode is set to Timeout In External As with External Level External Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated Edge by pressing the EZ Button but unlike External Level the read cycle ends with a good read output a timeout or a new trigger Unlatch Outputs In this configuration the EZ Button will unlatch any logic outputs that have been latched Parameter Switch The parameter switch toggles between custom defaults and power on settings The condition is the same as that achieved by sending the lt Arc gt and lt Arp gt commands consecutively QX Hawk Industrial
38. Code 39 is considered the standard for non retail 1D symbology An alphanumeric symbology with unique start stop code patterns composed of 9 black and white elements per character of which 3 are wide Code 39 Enabled Check Character Status Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Full ASCII Set Disabled Check Character Status Enables or Disables the check character Check Character Status Disabled izabled Enabled Check Character Output Status Check Character Output Status when added to the symbol provides additional data security When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Check Character Output Status Disabled izabled Enabled Note With Check Character Output Status enabled and an External Edge External Level or Serial Data trigger option enabled an invalid check character calculation will cause a No Read Message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Large Intercharacter Gap Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification When enabled the imager can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 3x the narrow element width Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Disab
39. Commands Source Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector B Options 0 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector A 1 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector B 2 RS 422 on QX Hawk Connector B 4 Ethernet TCP Port 1 5 Ethernet TCP Port 2 Daisy Chain ID Status Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Daisy Chain ID Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 Options One or two ASCII characters A 30 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Trigger Trigger Filter Duration Appendices lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter duration trailing edge trigger filter duration gt Serial Trigger Character External Trigger State lt K201 serial trigger character gt lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 mode read cycle timeout gt Decodes Before Output lt K221 number before output gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Serial Trigger Start Character lt K229 start character gt Serial Trigger Stop Character lt K230 stop character gt Capture Mode Capture Time lt K241 mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt lt K242 time before first capture time between 1 2 time between 2 3 time between
40. Duplex Output at End of Read Cycle Full Duplex Custom Mutpuk at ETA R Oukput at Timeout U0 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Disabled 5 29 Communication Transparent Mode When Transparent Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Enabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Disabled Echo to Source Fixed to Enabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Enabled Output at ETX Fixed to Enabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Enabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation Source Port data will echo back to itself Source Port data will always pass through even when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host Whenever ETX is received on the Source Port or symbol data is generated the data will be send to the Destination Port with its data appearing between the Preamble and symbol data Source Port data will always be sent to the Destination Port with a Preamble and Postamble Symbol data will be sent to the Source Port on a good read without Preamble or Postamble in Point to Point protocol even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host Destination Port data always echoes to the Source Port even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode Hal Other il Devices A ee
41. ESP and the imager and ESP and the host spore hard drive Recent File Exit Save to Imager Receive Imager Settings Import Export Import converts the ASCII settings from a text file to ESP configuration settings Export converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file 2 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Model The Model dropdown menu shows a list of recent imagers that have been used with ESP When a different model is chosen the connection to the present model is terminated OX Hawk i Mew Model Remove Model To connect to another model select New Model choose a new model from the pop up menu that appears and click OK Note When an ESP file is saved the settings of all the models defined in that file are saved QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 5 Menu Toolbar Options The Options menu allows the user to save memos and set up ESP Preferences Note Preferences will be saved and loaded into ESP whenever Preferences ESP is opened next whether or not the ESP file is saved Options Document Mema Model Memo Preferences gt General Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced The Toolbar Style T options allow the user C Reload Last File f Show Both lean and Text to determine how ESP will display the mode options in the two rows i Show Connect Prompt Only Show Text at the top of the sc
42. Enable Enter Postamble characters by Check the Enter Postamble characters by double clicking in the text field and Parse boxes double clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator beneath the then using the Postamble calculator symbols to be formatted Postamble CR LF i SOH STX ETX EOT Engl ACK BEL BS HT LF vt FF cal sof si s1 pet Dc2f Des Deal SoH sTx ETX EoT Engl ACK BEL Bs HT LF oaa T s1 ej Dc2 Dc3 Deal NAK SYN ETB CAN Em sue Esc FS Gs RS us sP NAK SYN ETB CAN Em sue ESc FS GS RS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Cancel Click Delete to remove characters Cancel QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 29 Output Format Symbol Parse Extract SendardSve Receve Symbol Parse Hide Parse Table out eis aa Step Insert Data Extract Range Step Insert Data Extract Range Extract 2 4 The Extract Ran ge Extract 2 4 function corresponds to the Start Location and Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command Sample Symbol r Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVW lt v201 23456789 Output BCD Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRS TUYWv201 23456789 Multiple character sequences can be extracted and inserted using Symbol Parse In this example the
43. Green Flash Duration value Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read Targeting Glas On Green Flash Duration 11 000 gt Seconds Beeper 00d Read LED Configuration ISQVUIEC 16022 Grade Final Grade 5 100 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Beeper An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred A beep is emitted after each good read or No Read Note The beeper will also sound at any of the following times e When the imager is defaulted e When a Send and Save command is sent from ESP e At the conclusion of an Auto Calibration procedure e When a lt Z gt lt Zp gt lt Zrd gt or lt K701 1 gt command is sent from ESP s Terminal E Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read Targeting Always On Green Flash Duration 100 Good Read v Disabled G oo d F Fel d x NoRead y O LED Configuration ISO IEC 1602 Grade QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 101 I O Parameters LED Configuration When the Symbol Grade Standard is set to ISO IEC 16022 grade and the Bar Graph is configured for Grading this parameter determines which ISO IEC 16022 grade to display on the LED bar graph Using the read rate scale as reference if the ISO IEC 16022 grade result was a grade A all the LEDs from 20 to 100 would be illuminated If the result was a grade F only the 20 LED would illuminate ISO IEC 16022 Grade Outpuk Indicators Green
44. Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters RS 232 B The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 232 formatting R5232 B Enabled Baud Rate 115 2 Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Hone Odd Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 7 Communication Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Eight Seven Eight Data Bits Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Symbol Data Output JE nabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol infor
45. If a command with multiple fields is processed some of the lt fields may have been processed properly while others were not The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControliHes Output Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command Causes the imager to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed If an invalid command is entered the imager beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry However this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControliHex Output Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 103 I O Parameters Control Hex Output Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial commands on a terminal Determines the response to a Serial Command Echo or status request command When set to Control two characters are transmitted to represent a non displayable character For example a carriage return will be shown as M Serial Verification Se
46. Imager User s Manual pendices Contents Appendix A General Specifications ccccccsccccssececceseecceneecceseecesseeceaseeceeeesesseeecseneseeueaesnesees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications si cece ssc sulswces cecebesndo haw bcs be Miniesled cise deocaciwee loazsdoes Bian deat cdezcctbeels A 7 Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations cccccecccceeecceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeseeeeesaneees A 9 Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset PinOuts cccccsceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseaeeeesseeeeeeseaens A 11 Appendix E Serial COMMAS ccccccccssecccceeececaeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeceeeeeseueeesseueessaeeeeseueessaneeesees A 12 Appendix F Protocol COMMANGCS ccccscccceeeeceeseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeceseceeeseecessaeeessaeeeeseeeeesaes A 66 Appendix G ASCII Table 0 ccc ccccccccecccsesececeeeeeeseeceseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeseeeseecessaeeeeseueeseeaeeeseneeesans A 75 Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP ccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeessenseeeseaaes A 76 Appendix Interface Standards cccccccccccssscccceeceeeeeececeeeceseeeceeseecesseeeceseeeeseaeeeseueeessaeeessaes A 79 Appendix J Glossary Of Terms cccccccccceecceceecceceeceeeeeceeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseecesseecessueceeseesessaeeeesaes A 80 A 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual General Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Mechan
47. Industrial Imager User s Manual Subnet Parameters Enter the Subnet address of the imager in this field Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Qukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Gukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Gutput External Source Processing Mode QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Enabled 197 168 0100 255 255 0 0 WU U U DHCP 001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 2003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 5 15 Communication Gateway Enter the Gateway address of the imager in this field Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 166 0 100 Subnet 255 755 00 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHF TCP Port 1 20i Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TEP Port 2 z003 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command 5 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual IP Address Mode Determines how the imager s IP address will be defined Ethernet IP Address Subnet hateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TEF Port 2 Symbol Data Gubpuk Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Proc
48. LRC Status Used when extra data integrity is required An error checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions It is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX start of text up to and including the ETX end of text What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmission are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 two 1s 0 two Os 0 a 1 and a 0 1 The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver usually the host performs the same addition and compares the results Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port R5232 4 ACK f NAK Options RES MLL REQ MUL STX MUL ETX MUL ACK ALK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REC ENG STA STA ETX ETK ACK ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout LRE Status Disabled D i fa b E d Enabled 5 28 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual External Data Routing Parameters External Data Routing settings configure the global operation of all external data port settings External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RS232 4 Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Qutouk ak ETA CR Output ab Timeout 200 External Data Routing Options Se External Daka Routing Destination Port Disabled Ambles to Source Transparent Echo to Source Half
49. Save as Customer Defaults Default all ESP Settings Activates all changes in current memory and saves to the imager Advanced Options i for power on Send and Save as Customer Defaults lt Zc gt Saves default settings for quick retrieval This option will be visible only if Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults is checked in ESP Preferences 2 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Defaulting When Default Current Menu Settings or Default all ESP Settings are selected only the ESP settings are defaulted Advanced Options Send Current View This is the same as Save to Reader gt Send No Save except that only the commands in the current configuration Save to Reader tree are sent Receive Reader Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default all Settings Send Current Command This is the same as Send Current View except that it saves only the command that is currently selected Add Exception Remove Exception Advanced Options Send Current View Send Current Command Add Remove Exception After a Receive Reader Settings command is performed and the Add Exception option is selected a list of serial commands may appear These are commands that may be in the imager s firmware but are not included in or are different from the current version of ESP These commands can be edited by double clicking them and changing them as needed It is important to note that these comman
50. Stop Output Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 37 Serial Commands Fixed Symbol Length Status Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 Check Character Type Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Mod 16 2 NW Mod 11 3 Both Mod 16 and NW7 Mod 11 Check Character Output
51. TCP Port 1 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters TCP Port 2 One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the imager The default setting is 2003 Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 166 0 100 Subnet foo 2c 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP TCP Port 1 O01 Symbol Data Gukpuk Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Se TCF Port 2 2003 1024 65535 Symbol Data Oukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager Command Command enables command processing in the imager Data Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 2 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two w
52. This is because the RS 232 transmitter is always left on when enabled Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix F for sample Polling Mode communication scenarios Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 A ATK l NAK Options RES MLL REQ MUL STs MUL ETH MUL ALK ALK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES ET REC ENG ST STs ET ETH ALE ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout z LEC Status Disabled RES NAK Defaults RES Reset EOT 0x04 REQ Request ENQ 0x05 STX Start of Text STX 0x02 ETX End of Text ETX 0x03 ACK Acknowledge ACK 0x06 NAK Negative Acknowledge NAK 0x15 5 26 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Response Timeout Only used when a response is required from the host While in Multidrop if the imager does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data it will act on a fault The imager can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero The time that the imager will wait before timing out if ACK NAK and ETX are enabled and a host response is expected Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port AS52324 ACK PAK Options RES ALL REQ MUL STA MUL ETA MUL ALK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STA ETK ETX ACK ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout 0 005 Seconds LRC Status Disabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 27 Communication
53. US SP Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Sequence on No Read Parameters Sequence on No Read is useful when the imager needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs When Sequence on No Read is Enabled and Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the imager sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read When disabled it does not sequence on a No Read Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Sequence on Mismatch Mew Master Pin Disabled Enabled Disabled Sequence Step Enabled Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Enabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 004 sequence on No Read 004 004 005 005 No Read 006 sequence on No Read 006 No Read 007 sequence on No Read 007 007 008 Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Disabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 003 not sequenced 003 003 004 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 004 005 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 167 Matchcode Sequence on Mismatch Note Matchcode Type must be set to Sequential for this com
54. Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 255 Humber to Output On T Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 2 Parameters Output Or Mismatch or Mo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Mumber to Output On D 255 Decodes per Trigger T QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 139 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle crosses the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Tri
55. Yes Example A5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Character and Check Character Output enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies e For Code 128 a 1 indicates EAN 128 otherwise the modifier is 0 e For all other symbologies the modifier is 0 5 92 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Y A Parameters Parameters Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the I O tab to display the I O Parameters tree control Farameters ESP Values I O Parameters Symbol Gata Gukpuk aood Read 4 Wo Read Message Enabled 4 Read Duration Gutput Disabled 4 Output Object Info Disabled H Output Indicators W Serial Verification 4 EZ Trax Output Disabled EZ Button Enabled W Status Indicators PHY Activity Calibration Options Database Identifier Output Disabled The indicates E that the setting lt i o E Eo H Output 1 Parameters H Output 2 Parameters Reset Counts Output 3 Parameters Unlatch Output i Duality Output To open nested options To change a setting double click the single click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note I O Parameters settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the I O Parameters section
56. a 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt b gt a request for the boot code build number is sent the imager returns lt b 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt d gt a request for the DSP code build number is sent the imager returns lt d 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt e When lt k gt a request for the kernel code build number is sent the imager returns lt k 35 XXXXXX RR BBB gt 7 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Bar Code Configuration Mode Definition Bar Code Configuration Mode is a way of programming the imager by using ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols Serial Cmd lt BCCFG gt Bar Code Configuration Mode can be entered three different ways 1 By forcing the imager into Bar Code Configuration Mode by serial command lt BCCFG gt 2 By configuring one of the 4 EZ Button positions to Bar Code Configuration Mode 3 By reading a Data Matrix symbol with a special code word used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify imager programming This can be either in a regular read cycle or during a read rate test Reading this symbol in the calibration routine will have no effect Once Bar Code Configuration Mode has been entered the Data Matrix symbols can be thought of as serial data You can configure the imager by printing labels in Microscan s serial command format Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port The imager will acknowledge the symbol with a beep green flash and echo the
57. anywhere on the graph a vertical red line appears at that point and its position and value in terms of black to white are updated in the Pixel Info table to the left of the graph 237 in this example In addition a horizontal dashed red line is displayed that indicates the average value QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 13 Calibration Calibration The Calibration interface in ESP is a powerful and intuitive way to optimize the imager s performance It allows the user to control several complex simultaneous calibration operations and to follow the progress of those operations using cues such as progress bars real time representations of calibration values and other dynamic user feedback V Auto Syne with Reader H Focus Quality Before After Beginning calibration Capture Settings Gain 20 Fixed Shutter Speed 2500 s Fixed Focal Distance Calibrate v Symbology Settings Best Symbol Calibration Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 v Fixed Composite Enabled Window of Interest WOI Framing Row and Column v WOI Margin 75 F Before After Capture Settings Gain 20 E Fixed Shutter Speed 2500 F Fixed Focal Distance Calibrate v Symbology Settings Symbol Calibration Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 y MFixed Composite Enabled Window of Interest WOI Framing Row and Column v WOI Margin 75 s
58. calibration process Calibrate Autodiscrimination is in effect during the calibration process All symbologies readable by the product except PDF417 and Pharmacode will be attempted during calibration Any new symbologies successfully decode during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process All enabled symbologies will remain enabled For example assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will thereafter be enabled Window of Interest Framing If a WOI framing mode is enabled when calibration begins it will set the camera WOI to a full size image Once a symbol is decoded the camera WOI will be zoomed in both vertically and horizontally regardless which WOI mode is enabled to include the symbol plus an additional margin This is done to speed up the calibration process When calibration completes and is successful then the camera WOI will be adjusted according to the mode enabled Otherwise the original WOI configuration will be retained B Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate hal Window of Interest Margin Don t Calibrate Row and Column Row Column Don t Calibrate The Window of Interest is not modified after the completion of Calibration 5 120 QX Hawk Industrial Imager U
59. camera setting has been modified from one database setting to the next a new image is captured For example if all database entries contained the same camera setting values but had different IP Decode configurations the only time an image frame would be captured would be when the 1st database configuration was used 4 22 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Image Dimensions This feature defines how the image dimension parameters are implemented Window of Interest WOI In this mode the database image dimension parameters are Camera Settings and dictate the size of the image to be captured Region of Interest ROI In this mode the database image dimension parameters are Image Processing Decode Settings and specify the region or area of the captured image to be processed The ROI coordinate data is based on the full scale image size The WOI of the captured image will be configured to cover all the active database ROI settings In the following example there are three active database setting with different ROI configurations Their coordinates are based at point 0 0 of the full scale image SXGA 1280 x 1024 or VGA 640 X 480 The image WOI is not configurable it is automatically setup by the database based on the ROI settings This feature is intended to be used in conjunction with the Image Process Looping feature to allow processing different regions of a captured image with different Image Processing De
60. can be enabled to sub sample pixels in the specified image frame Sub sampling can be specified as either 4 1 or 16 1 which signifies the sampling rate Sub sampling Disabled al 4 1 1 pixel output for every 4 pixels sampled When selected the image will be sampled 2 1 in the vertical direction and 2 1 in the horizontal direction for a combined 4 1 ratio An image with a dimension of 640 x 480 will be scaled to 320 x 240 16 1 1 pixel output for every 16 pixels sampled When selected the image will be sampled 4 1 in the vertical direction and 4 1 in the horizontal direction for a combined 16 1 ratio An image with a dimension of 640 x 480 will be scaled to 160 x 120 4 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Window of Interest El Window of Interest Top T Left T Height 450 width foe The active pixel area of the image sensor is defined as the Window of Interest WOI This allows the user to select an area in the Field of View that the desired symbol will be located The programmable window of interest is useful for increasing decode speed improving threshold selecting desired symbol from multiple symbols in FOV The user provides the upper left pixel location and the size in both rows and columns to define the Window of Interest Important Notes e The column width value is required to be a modulus 16 value so regardless of the column width setting that is configured the actual column
61. can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 Full ASCII Set Disabled l 23 b E d x Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 67 Symbologies Code 128 Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with limited space and high security requirements A very dense alphanumeric symbology It encodes all 128 ASCII characters it is continuous has variable length and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge Code 128 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Symbol Length 10 EAN Status Disabled Oukput Format Standard Application Record Separator Status Disabled Application Record Separator Char i Application Record Brackets Disabled Application Record Padding Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered a valid symbol Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Symbol Length Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted This specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length Symbal Length 10 1 64 al 5 68 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters EA
62. communications system in which signals can travel between devices in both directions but not simultaneously Histogram A graphical representation of the frequency of occurrence of each intensity or range of intensities gray levels of pixels in an image The height represents the number of observations occurring in each interval Host A computer PLC or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals Image Projection of an object or scene onto a plane i e screen or image sensor Image Processing IP Transformation of an input image into an output image with desired properties Image Resolution The number of rows and columns of pixels in an image A higher resolution means that more pixels are available per element of the symbol being read Examples 640 x 480 VGA 854 x 480 WVGA 1280 x 1024 SXGA 2048 x 1536 QXGA Image Sensor A device that converts a visual image to an electrical signal a CCD or CMOS array Initialize Implement serial configuration commands into the imager s active memory Input A channel or communications line Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a device Integration Exposure of pixels on a CMOS sensor IP See Image Processing Ladder Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are parallel to the symbol s direction of travel LED See Light Emitting Diode Light Emitting D
63. e h 2i wae Effect of Command RES D 04 Reset REQ AE 05 Request EOT 4D 04 Reset STX B 02 Start of Text ETX AC 03 End of Text ACK al 06 Acknowledge NAK AU 15 Negative Acknowledge XON Q 11 Begin Transmission XOFF S 13 Stop Transmission A 66 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual ACK NAK Data Flow Examples Setup 1 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK LRC Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX imager_TX imager_TX HOST_TX 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x15 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled lt K141 0 gt ACK lt K141 gt ACK lt K141 0 gt ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX imager_TX imager_TX symbol data NAK host rejects symbol data resend data ACK transaction complete lt K141 gt ACK lt K141 0 gt timeout reached timeout reached timeout reached Timeout Reached transaction aborted data is flushed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices A 67 Protocol Commands Setup 2 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK LRC Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX imager_TX imager_TX HOST_TX 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x15 enabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Nr Nr SNS lt K141 0 gt a ACK lt K141 gt B ACK lt K141 0 gt a ACK Error Condition Transfer 1
64. equation e 2d lt d p where e is the number of erasures t is the number of errors d is the number of error correction codewords and p is the number of codewords reserved for error detection The Unused Error Correction parameter tests the extent to which regional or spot damage in the symbol has eroded the decoding safety margin that error correction provides The grade is defined in this way A 4 0 if UEC 62 B 3 0 if UEC 50 C 2 0 if UEC 2 37 D 1 0 if UEC 25 F 0 0 if UEC lt 25 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Targeting Activate Targeting System sending a lt 11 gt command lower case L and numeral 1 from ESP s Terminal activates the imager s targeting system De activate Targeting System Sending a lt 10 gt command lower case L and numeral 0 de activates the imager s targeting system QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 31 Temperature Temperature Sending a lt TEMP gt command from ESP s Terminal will cause the imager to output the current temperature of the image sensor in degrees celsius The output from this command is only updated after an image frame has been captured If the command is requested but an image has not been captured the previous temperature output value will remain the same Output Example lt TEMP gt lt TEMP 30 50c gt 7 32 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Y Modem Transfer Options Y Modem Up
65. extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data A 22 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices RS 422 Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 C
66. for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 3 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the imager will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers Number to Gukpuk On No Fead Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers 5 14
67. gt Single Command Default This request will default a single K command to original factory parameters 7 26 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Learn Operations Learn Sending the lt LEARN gt command from ESP s Terminal will put the imager into a mode of operation that will cause it to learn the next Data Matrix symbol decoded This mode of operation will remain active until either a Data Matrix symbol is decoded or the call is made to disable the mode and revert back to normal operation Upon decoding a Data Matrix symbol the image processing will save pertinent information regarding the target symbol to allow it to be processed more quickly and consistently going forward The data collected by the Learn operation can be saved for a Power On condition by sending the lt Z gt command Unlearn sending the lt UNLEARN gt command will cause the imager to discard any information acquired during a Learn operation The Unlearn state can be saved for a Power On condition by sending the lt Z gt command Learn Status Sending the lt LEARN gt request will return the current status of Learn operations Responses are sent in this format lt LEARN 0 gt Default symbol has not been learned lt LEARN 1 gt Learn operation in progress lt LEARN 2 gt Symbol has been learned QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 27 Reboot System Reboot System Sending a lt reboot gt command from ES
68. initiates a read cycle Very Large Scale Integration VLSI The creation of integrated circuits by combining thousands of transistor based circuits on a single chip VLSI See Very Large Scale Integration Watchdog Timer A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to reset the imager QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 85 Glossary of Terms A 86 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual
69. number output coordinates gt ISO IEC 16022 Grade LED Display lt K737 unused LED AIM LED display gt Green Flash LED lt K750 LED status targeting status green flash duration gt Status Indicators lt K751 comm bar graph I O 1 1 O 2 gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator character gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Diagnostics Output 1 lt K790 unused service unit gt Diagnostics Output 2 lt K791 unused service unit gt Diagnostics Output 3 Symbol Quality Output 1 Symbol Quality Output 2 lt K792 unused service unit gt lt K800 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt lt K801 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Out
70. of Appendix E QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 93 I O Parameters Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not be confused with Outputs 1 2 and 3 listed in the Output Parameters which describe output states and functions Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions Defines the conditions under which decoded symbol data is transmitted to the host Note Symbol Data Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Se Symbol Data Output Good Read When to Output Symbol Data Disabled Match Mismatch la oo d F ea d x Symbol Data Output Status Disabled It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the imager to do the decision making When Disabled the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks When set to Disabled the imager will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle symbols No Reads etc Match Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data When set to Match the imager transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol However if Matchcode Type is Disabled it transmits on any good read Note A No Read can
71. on QX Hawk Connector B 4 Ethernet TCP Port 1 5 Ethernet TCP Port 2 6 EtherNet IP QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Ambles to Source Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Echo to Source Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output at End of Read Cycle Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output at ETX Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default CR 0x0D Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Output at Timeout Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 200 x10 ms 2 seconds Options 0 65535 Array Communication Modes Mode Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Daisy Chain QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 29 Serial
72. one symbol on the top and symbols on either side requires at least three imagers to ensure that all symbols will be decoded The highlighted areas below demonstrate how a daisy chain can be arranged One imager is placed above the conveyor line and one imager is placed on each side of the line The three imagers essentially function as a single imager and data is sent from the primary imager to the host or PLC Important Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional imagers in the daisy chain lt ie To Power i Supply Qx 1 or PLC r E vat Er a Se Tna O gt D W ep ME Co m r _ HI TL J T ua To Power Supply z q To Power A QX 1 g i I E E Supply psi AR Host or PLC 3 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation Multidrop Multidrop networks are used in applications where it is necessary to decode symbols at multiple locations within an industrial process Imagers are placed at stations located between manufacturing steps and data from those imagers is directed to a multidrop concentrator before being sent to a host An example of this type of application is food packaging in which part number data is collected and tracked throughout the packaging process The highlighted areas below demonstrate how a multidrop network can be arranged gt
73. s field See Serial Configuration Command Conventions for a more detailed explanation of this command shortcut Protocol Selection Protocol Serial Cmd lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt Options 0 Point to Point 1 Point to Point with RTS CTS 2 Point to Point with XON XOFF 3 Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF 4 ACK NAK 5 Polling Mode QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 27 Serial Commands Address Serial Cmd Default Options Protocol Port Serial Cmd Default Options lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt 1 1 50 1 Poll address 0x1C select address 0x1D 2 Poll address Ox1E select address 0x1F 50 Poll address 0x7E select address 0x7F lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt 0 0 1 0 Main RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector A 1 RS 422 485 on QX Hawk Connector B External Data Routing Mode Serial Cmd Default Options lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Transparent 2 Half Duplex 3 Full Duplex 4 Customized Destination Port Serial Cmd Default Options A 28 lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt 0 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector A 0 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector A 1 RS 232 on QX Hawk Connector B 2 RS 422
74. s Manual A 81 Glossary of Terms Edge Enhancement Image processing method to strengthen high spatial frequencies in the image EPROM See Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Embedded Memory Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash End of Read Cycle The time or condition at which the imager stops expecting symbol information to decode Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EPROM A memory chip that retains data when its power supply is turned off non volatile memory External Edge Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object rising edge The read cycle ends with a good read a timeout or a new trigger External Level Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector s range Falling Edge A change of state to inactive associated with a level trigger Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA A semiconductor device containing programmable interconnects and logic components Fill Factor Percentage of pixel area used for light collection Firmware Software hard coded in non volatile memory ROM and closely tied to specific pieces of hardware Fixed Symbol Length Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Focal Distance In camera based vision the distan
75. serial data to the host If the command causes the imager to produce more serial output such as serial verification or counter requests the data will be routed to the host port Bar Code Configuration Mode can be exited by any reset lt A gt or lt Z gt command as well as a lt J gt or a quick press and release of the EZ Button The command to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode can be included as part of the Data Matrix symbol For example try encoding lt K200 4 gt lt K220 1 gt lt J gt into a Data Matrix symbol This configures the imager to enable Serial Trigger Mode to program a new trigger to end the read cycle and to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode with lt J gt To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release 1 In normal reading modes it is required to read a special Data Matrix symbol with a special codeword used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify imager programming QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 21 Calibration Calibration sending the lt CAL gt command from ESP s Terminal initiates auto calibration without entering the auto calibration menu The calibrated parameters are determined by the settings of the Calibration Options command Lens Calibration Important The lt OPTIC gt command should only be used when changing the lens module Sending the lt OPTIC gt command puts the imager into a setup mode for the purpose of Improving the accuracy of the focal distance
76. source processing mode gt RS 232 B Data Type lt K131 symbo data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 422 Data Type lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC Status lt K145 status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain lt K150DAIS Y gt Protocol Selection lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt External Data Routing lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Array Communication Modes RS 232A Baud Rate RS 232 A lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 3 4800 6 38 4K 9 230K A 18 1 1200 2 2400 4
77. status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Separator Character Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Application Record Brackets Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Padding Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separation Factor Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed
78. still be transmitted if Enabled Mismatch Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container With Mismatch enabled the imager transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Good Read Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted It s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified With Good Read enabled the imager transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled 5 94 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters When to Output Symbol Data This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host Symbol Data Output When to Output Symbol Data As Soon As Possible T 5 oor fan Possible End of Read Cycle As Soon As Possible As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data Note More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read depending on how Decodes Before Output is set Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded En
79. the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 30 1 100 Object Info Gutpuk Disabled Grade Output Disabled Object Info Output If a symbol is decoded during an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary symbol information is also included EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality g Object Info Output Disabled z Grade Output e Enabled 5 106 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Grade Output Symbol quality information will be output in the form of an abbreviated identifier for each read cycle EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Pork Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 30 Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled D l a b l E d x Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 107 I O Parameters EZ Button EZ Button Serves as a master switch to enable disable the EZ Button status GE Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Load Config DE Enabled Save For Power on Disabled Single Beep Target System i Two Beeps Calibrate Three Beeps Read Rate Four Beeps Save For Power on The EZ Button has four positions Single Beep Two
80. the imager and the host Connecting Select the COM Port com Fress Skart bo autoconnect se Select the COM Fort COM COM Other Autoconnect e If the communication port is not the default COM1 use the dropdown menu to change the port Connecting Select the COM Part com J600 N 7 1 e Once the correct port is chosen click Start to connect Stop e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 13 Menu Toolbar View The View menu allows the user to move quickly between the Parameters Setup Terminal and Utilities interfaces without TIE using the icon buttons on the App Mode toolbar It also allows EECC the user to access the Bar Code Dialog shown below Setup Bar Code Dialog Symbols can be created in the Bar Code Dialog by typing the Terminal Utilities Bar Code Dialog text to be encoded This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols allowing the user to configure the imager by reading the user created symbols Choose a spatial orientation for the new symbol 2 14 Bar Code Yalue a gt lt a encode new symbols Bar Code Configuration Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to Caption S
81. user to define a service message of up to 128 characters Service Message Status Disahled Service Messa SERVI CE Threshold UU Resolution Seconds Threshold Allows the user to determine the length of time until the service message will be sent Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 1 65535 Resolution Seconds Resolution The service timer has a resolution field for setting up the timer increment Options are increments of seconds or minutes Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 Resolution Seconds EBcor d a QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 173 Diagnostics User Defined Name User Defined Name allows the user to enter any combination of ASCII characters to identify the imager User Defined Name T a H A W K 5 174 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual es 6 ferminal Contents Temminal VINO OW fc oateeseaceocts cassaect aan are sti apsste seams eed pastas Ee oe cea tiecunaensteseest 6 2 FIN see ectes ene E E esi deae nee eaiae tise asada ute stun a adene cae aniasacanentuaueeasseaneres 6 3 Sa srs sce a cece ses eae ie ste ns acs cig E EAEE E EE E O E ES TT 6 4 ETE pa SAE E na ne ee oe ee ee eee eer 6 5 Terminal Window Me NnuS ccccccccceceececeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeseuseueeeeeeeeeesaeeaueusaeeeeeeeeeeeeaueaeseeeeseneauaneaeenees 6 6 This section describes the multiple functions of E
82. width will be decreased if required to a modulus 16 value For example a column width value of 632 would actually be 640 A user request of this setting would still return 632 e The column pointer is required to be an even value so regardless of the column pointer setting that is configured the actual column pointer will be decreased if required to an even value For example a column pointer value of 101 would actually be 100 A user request of this setting would still return 101 Top Defines the row position of the upper left starting point of the image window Window of Interest 0 480 Left Height 480 width TOZ Left Defines the column position of the upper left starting point of the image window B Window of Interest Top U 0 752 Height 50 Width oe QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 9 Camera Setup Height Defines the size in rows of the image window Maximum value is defined as the Maximum row size of Image sensor minus the row pointer value Ee Window of Interest Top T Left O 480 S Oto 480 Top width TOZ Width Defines the size in columns of the image window Maximum value is defined as the Maximum column size of Image sensor minus the column pointer value Window of Interest 4 10 Top 0 Left 0 Height 450 Width foe Sto re Left QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Evaluation In Evaluation you can view images currently in the imager ca
83. your keyboard settings such as the cursor blink rate and the character repeat rate Microsoft Office Outlook Profiles Customize your mouse settings such as the button configuration double click speed mouse pointers and motion speed Specify the CD DYD burn rights For the Nero Family of products Connects to other computers networks and the Internet Configure your NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager settings Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settings Configure energy saving settings for your computer Shows installed printers and Fax printers and helps you add new ones Customize settings for the display of languages numbers times and dates Add remove and configure scanners and cameras Schedule computer tasks to run automatically View your current security status and access important settings SoundMAX Control Panel Change the sound scheme for your computer or configure the settings for your speakers and recording devices Change settings for text to speech and for speech recognition if installed See information about your computer system and change settings For hardware performance and automatic updates Customize the Start Menu and the taskbar such as the types of items to be displayed and how they should appear Change user account settings and passwords for people who share this computer Configure the Windows Firewall Set up or add to a wireless network for your home or office Connects to other com
84. 0 being the highest When possible use the highest quality when image transfer speed must be increased use a lower image quality setting Adjustments for this setting will depend on your specific hardware and software limitations Line Scan C JPEG Images JPEG Image Quality Low High z0 1 100 NOTE Linescan is unavailable when using JPEG C Contrast pending_18200_2 64 ms QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 11 Evaluation Histogram The Histogram function is useful in determining quality and contrast of symbols A histogram is a graphic representation of the numeric count of the occurrence of each intensity gray level in an image The horizontal axis represents the values of gray levels and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels for each gray level Note Since histograms are performed in the imager the results will be saved regardless of whether the image was uploaded as a JPEG jpg or a bitmap bmp 1 From the Evaluation window click the Histogram button The current image is transferred into the histogram operation This may take a moment since all the relevant pixels are being evaluated intensively 2 When the Histogram window opens you may need to expand the window and or adjust the scroll bars in order to bring the image into view 3 To generate a histogram click and drag your cursor diagonally across the symbol or a portion of the symbol The i
85. 0 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 050 symbols ECC 080 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 080 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 080 symbols 5 62 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters ECC 100 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 100 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 100 symbols ECC 140 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 140 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 140 symbols ECC 120 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 120 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 120 symbols ECC 130 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 130 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 130 symbols QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 63 Symbologies QR Code QR Code Disabled k Dis abled Enabled Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode QR Code symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode QR Code symbols 5 64 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Micro QR Code Micro OR Code Disabled hal Disabled Enabled Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode Micro QR Code symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode Micro QR Code symbols QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 65 Symbologies Code 39
86. 110G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 15 Degree Optic Serial FIS 6800 1110G FIS 6800 0210G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 15 Degree Optic Ethernet QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 30 Degree Optic Serial FIS 6800 1210G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 30 Degree Optic Ethernet FIS 6800 0310G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 45 Degree Optic Serial FIS 6800 1310G QX Hawk Industrial Imager CMOS 45 Degree Optic Ethernet A 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix B Electrical Specifications 9 Watts max 10 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 270mA at Power Requirement 24VDC typ QX Hawk Connectors QX Hawk Back View A is a serial M12 12 pin plug B is a serial M12 12 pin socket or an Ethernet M12 8 pin socket Output 2 3 Default 11 New Master 4 Output 1 5 id Output 3 6 10 as 232 Po F Trigger Ground 7 2 Power a R Input Common 8 9 RS 232 RxD Output Common A Serial M12 12 pin Plug RS 422 485 RxD g RS 232 TxD RS 232 RTS L Trigger Ay 49 RS 232 RxD RS 232 CTS EN Input Common 8 RS 422 485 o L RxD RS 422 485 5 TxD J 2 Power Input 1 4 s 3 Terminated RS 422 485 TxD B Serial M12 12 pin Socket QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual TX 7 Terminated Terminated O Pi on me 2 Tis amp zJ a _ ye Sites 3 Terminated
87. 3 4 time between 4 5 time between 5 6 time between 6 7 time between 7 8 gt Store No Read Image lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Image Processing Timeout lt K245 image processing timeout gt Number of Symbols in Field of View lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Trigger Mode Filter Duration Trigger Mode Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default 0 Continuous Read Options 0 Continuous Read 1 Continuous Read 1 Output 2 External Level 3 External Edge 4 Serial Data 5 Serial Data and Edge Leading Edge Trigger Filter Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 x 32 0 us Trailing Edge Trigger Filter Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 x 32 0 us Serial Trigger Character Delimited Serial Cmd lt K201 serial trigger character gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 31 Serial Commands External Trigger State Serial Cmd lt K202 active state gt Default 1 Positive Options 0 Negative 1 Positive End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Mode Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 0 Timeout Option
88. 5 B Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Header Master Symbol Data Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 Master Symbol 5 Master 5 Symbol Data Delete master symbol data in this field 7 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Firmware Click the Utilities button and then the Firmware tab to Utilities display the Firmware view Read Fate Counters Device Control j Differences Master Database Firmware Firmware Update Firmware Vertication Firmware Update Firmware Update is used to download application code to the imager Application code versions are specific to the imager Consult with a sales representative before downloading application code If needed application code can be requested from Microscan To download application code 1 First be sure that the imager is connected to the host computer 2 Apply power to the imager 3 In the Firmware Update dropdown menu select App Code This will open a dialog that allows the user to browse for the application code file 4 Navigate to where the application code file is located on the host computer 5 Allow approximately a minute for firmware to download As the application code begins to download the imager will be silent the LEDs will flash intermittently and a progress indicator at the bottom of the ESP window will show when the download is co
89. 8 5 160 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Preferences Tab The Preferences tab allows the user to set defaults that are automatically activated when grading is completed For this reason the user is advised to set preferences before performing grading Report Locate Preferences i Show Tree Control Fields for report This information is appended at the Operator Name 3 Doe bottom of the report Company Name Yz Corp Choose the default report type to be generated when you click Save Report on the Report tab Check Autofit Content to ensure that saved PDF report content will fit on a single page Saved Options POF Files pdf sd i Show Report Options dialog during Save Report Default Report Type POF Files pd amp HTML Files htm l CSW Files cs Autofit Content Low Graphic HTML Append to file Rich Text Edit Files rtf We Store Report without file path prompt a l Typically you will be asked Use symbol data for file name whee vee wish to store your report CAD ocuments and Settings syrmnbol grades Default Path If you do not want to be prompted to choose a file Automatically open generated report Print after saving er bag E eb W Include Image Bitmap JPEG JPEG Image Quality 100 1 100 Click the Include Image check box to output the captured symbol image with your saved repor
90. 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Gutpuk State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers L 255 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On D 255 Decodes per Trigger T QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 149 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle crosses the decodes per trigger threshold Note
91. 9600 5 19 2K T 57 6K 8 115 2K QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Parity RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight RS 232 B Status RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Baud Rate RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 19 Serial Commands Data Bits RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight RS 422 Status RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0
92. A EOR E EN RER ds 4 17 Ordered OuUtpUt risser eee ee ee ener eee a rene EAA SEEREN AN Er eee eee eee eee 4 24 UTE OE TP OUI ret ss a eee ene ete se eeianiens Scene ees ee cae seo E ae ae 4 28 Boa E EEE E cee AE ee vant A ner tere E IEN ee eee A en eee ee ere eee eee eee 4 32 This section describes ESP s Setup interfaces Video Evaluation Calibration Window of Interest Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format and Dynamic Setup Each interface allows the user to make changes to imager configuration quickly and easily Z 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 1 Video Video The Video view allows the user to perform the same Locate Calibrate and Test routines There is also a focal distance adjustment tool to the right of the video view Video also features simple Capture and Decode functionality Video Evaluation Calibration WOT Configuration Database Ordered Output T Initiates Calibration routine Initiates Data Matrix Learn operation Calibrate Select Lens Initiates Select E Activates the imager s target pattern and initiates live Reader Optics dialog video display of the symbol in the field of view lt Allows the user to take an Initiates the Test routine image capture of the Allows the user to test the symbol in the field of view imag
93. Accessibility Options S Add Hardware Add or Remove Programs QQ Administrative Tools taj Adobe Gamma amp Automatic Updates Date and Time EN Display Folder Options F Fonts T Game Controllers Internet Options Sakeyboard OP mail Mouse nero BurnRights I NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager Phone and Modem Options amp Power Options Printers and Faxes wt Regional and Language Options Sy Scanners and Cameras E Scheduled Tasks D Security Center Dl Soundmax Sounds and Audio Devices ww Speech System B Taskbar and Start Menu 89 User Accounts eG Windows Firewall i a Wireless Network Setup Wizard lt Comments Adjust your computer settings for vision hearing and mobility Installs and troubleshoots hardware Install or remove programs and Windows components Configure administrative settings for your computer Calibrate monitor For consistent color create ICC profile Set up Windows to automatically deliver important updates Set the date time and time zone for your computer Change the appearance of your desktop such as the background screen saver colors font sizes and screen resolution Customize the display of files and Folders change file associations and make network files available offline Add change and manage fonts on your computer Add remove and configure game controller hardware such as joysticks and gamepads Configure your Internet display and connection settings Customize
94. Acid PFOA compounds above the maximum trace levels To view the documents stating these requirements please visit http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri CELEX 32002L0095 EN HTML and http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri OJ L 2006 372 0032 0034 EN PDF Please contact your sales manager for a complete list of Microscan s ROHS Compliant products This declaration is based upon information obtained from sources which Microscan believes to be reliable and from random sample testing however the information is provided without any representation of warranty expressed or implied regarding accuracy or correctness Microscan does not specifically run any analysis on our raw materials or end product to measure for these substances The information provided in this certification notice is correct to the best of Microscan s knowledge at the date of publication This notice is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification Users are responsible for determining the applicability of any ROHS legislation or regulations based on their individual use of the product viii QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual E 7 Quick Start Contents Step 1 CHECK HArdware ccccccescccscccseccecececnecceeceeeececeeceeeeceeeeeteneeteeceteeeteseeteneeteeeeteeeeeeessanees 1 2 Step Z COMNECLING SY STCM cc iecdemet ninth c a eE S E ESE 1 3 Step Poston he MACS Toaster eh re a pacer Gas ahead cae we sade Pade adatcte
95. Appendices Charge Coupled Device CCD A semiconductor device with an array of light sensitive elements that converts light images into electrical signals Check Character A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 character that is added to encoded symbol data for additional data integrity CMOS See Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor CMOS Like CCDs CMOS imagers include an array of photo sensitive diodes one diode within each pixel Unlike CCDs however each pixel in a CMOS imager has its own individual amplifier integrated inside Connector A plug or socket on a device or cable providing in out connectivity for various circuits and pins Concentrator Intermediary device that relays data from imagers to a host and commands from the host to the imagers or other devices Counter Memory space allocated to keep track of imager events DAC See Digital to Analog Converter Daisy Chain Linkage of primary and secondary imagers allowing data to be relayed up to the host via auxiliary port connections Decode A Good Read The successful interpretation and output of the information encoded in a symbol Default Restores ROM or flash settings initializes serial commands and resets all counters Delimited A delimited command or field is bracketed by predefined characters Decode Rate The number of good reads per second ahieved by an imager Darkfield Illumina
96. Auto Syne with Reader Best HI ae Gain Quality Beginning calibration ESP s Calibration interface shown during a calibration routine 4 14 ESP s Calibration interface shown after a calibration routine QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Window of Interest The active pixel area of the image sensor is called the Window of Interest WOI The WOI allows the user to select an area of the field of view in which the desired symbol is located The programmable window of interest increases decode speed improves threshold and makes it easy to select specific symbols from among several in the field of view The user provides the upper left pixel location and the size of the window to define the Window of Interest Window of Interest Top 0 Left 0 Height 450 Width Foe Caution Window of Interest will shrink the field of view and therefore could cause symbols to be missed in dynamic applications QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 15 Window of Interest Window of Interest Graphic Interface 1 3 4 16 From the Camera menu click the WOI tab to bring up Window of Interest If you haven t already captured an image click the Capture and Decode button to decode the present image If successful the Good Read indicator on the WOI tab will be green and the symbol will appear in the pane below Note You can resize the image by cl
97. CUS hice tices cists telecine opel a E ee daateemeee 3 3 QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and PinOuts cccccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 4 Power and Trigger SWItChing ccccccesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeas 3 6 Freep UIT FAC sonst erlan cede Repetto ara inlanceiha tte aad veo tbuad veh Alatantee ses dtestente anaes 3 7 Application Examples ccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeesaecessueeaaeeeseeesaeeeeaes 3 8 Chapter 4 Setup Vid GO ease en ete ease eae ice a Eee 4 2 VAI AT OM eraioos scectdetcnece eA ee Gd ead ee ee ea 4 11 calibration sasani es Gosselin iets eee ete a a 4 14 Window OF IMereSt aesaat a es nates s eisai cee 4 15 Configuration Database a ascccesccescev tact sense devidociv ices seeevcecieen eased 4 17 Ordered Outpt xo2o2 ioe csc a nee io le a kt ee 4 24 OUNDUT FORM a 25 2 cheno et cael eee eee coats eee Se Os 4 28 DY MaIMIG SOUP ac6 Sevier ate Oe eee ach nee eae ee 4 32 Chapter 5 Parameters COMMIT CATON aac es 2h has acct dt ool ie doe arate ca tate ec oiceeiGeiae aac 5 2 Read Cycle ane Rane a Mee nee Metre aS ere tea een See Le Rate Reo Tee eee mE eee 5 40 SVIMDOIOGICS suerte tee casice area E e iGeinaeee 5 61 YO Parameters ccccccececccceececeeececeeececseaceseuaeesseaeesseaeeessaeeesseeeessaeeeees 5 93 Symbol Quality 20 0 ccccceeeeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeceeeseseeessueeeeeeas 5 155 Mat CN COG lt MA 5 162 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual iii Table of C
98. Cave No 9 Save Current Settings as Customer lt Zc gt a AD ee No Q ks z Default Parameters for Power On Default tor Power On Oo Recall Microscan Default Settings O and Save for Power On Will not lt Zrd gt Send lt Zrd gt from Terminal No a default sticky settings 9 Press and i D J a EA Seng lt Zrc gt Send lt Zrc gt from Terminal ee on imager a When right clicking in a tree control to select Default Current Menu Settings or Default All ESP Settings it is important to note that only ESP settings are defaulted To save these defaults to the imager itself follow up with a Save to Reader Send and Save command b Only available in ESP if enabled in Preferences General tab accessible from the Options dropdown menu Resets Resets A commands affect only the current settings active memory and are not saved for power on Saved for Power on Power on parameters Z commands are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled to the imager or the lt Arp gt command is issued Defaults Defaults are Microscan firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled either by software or hardware reset QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 23 Default Reset Save Customer Default Parameters Customer default parameters saved by lt Zc gt are the same set of parameters as power on parameters but are saved in a different isolated section of NOVRAM T
99. Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 38 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Check Character Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 16 Options 0 to 128 Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character outout symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mod
100. D Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 49 Serial Commands Input 1 Serial Cmd lt K730 status active state gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Reset Counts 2 Unlatch Output Active State Serial Cmd lt K730 status active state gt Default 0 Active Open Options 0 Active Open 1 Active Closed Green Flash LED Green Flash Mode Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Default 1 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 Static Presentation 3 Match 4 Mismatch 5 Strobe Green Flash Duration Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Default 100 1 second Options 0 to 65535 in 10 ms increments Status Indicators Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph I O 1 1 O 2 gt Default 1 PHY Activity Options 0 Disabled 1 PHY Activity 2 Protocol Activity Bar Graph Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph I O 1 I O 2 gt Default 1 Read Rate Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate Good Read A 50 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices I O 1 Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 O 2 gt Default 1 Output Active Options 0 Disabled 1 Output Active 2 Input Active I O 2 Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 0 2 gt Default 2 Input Active Options 0 Disabled 1 Output Active 2 Input Acti
101. Differences Parameters Read Cycle E Multisymbal H Trigger Serial Trigger Decodes Before Output H End of Read Cycle Capture Mode Capture Time Store Wo Read Image H Image Processing Settings fl Ee from Default Master Database Tabbed tree Firmware controls ESP Values Autoconnect to the imager Send and Receive command settings and Switch Model Mirror Image reverses the image Contrast brightens the image lt iil For Help press F1 Click Capture and Decode to decode the symbol in the field of y view and to see a high resolution a a image capture of the symbol Attribute Symbol data is displayed here Qx Hawk 1 OX Hawk EGRREGTERIIINY Point to Point COM1 115 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 3 Menu Toolbar Menu Toolbar File New Whenever New is selected the default configuration of ESP is a loaded se Mew Chrl h Open Save Open Cra When Save or Save As is selected the ESP configuration is Save Chrl 5 saved to the host computer s hard drive and available whenever Save os the same file is selected under Open Important When configuration changes are saved to the hard PEMEak Ctrl F drive these changes are not automatically saved to the imager Irn l port The illustration below shows how settings can be saved and ence received between
102. Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Baud Rate RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Ethernet Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices IP Address Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Default 192 168 0 100 Options 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Subnet Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Default 255 255 0 0 Options 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Gateway Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Default 0 0 0 0 Options 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP Address Mode Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway IP address mode gt Default 1 DHCP Options 0 Static 1 DHCP Ethernet TC
103. E QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 31 Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup is used to calculate image capture timing during a read cycle Without proper timing the imager will not be able to decode all symbols in a read cycle An external trigger is used to activate image captures so the user can make timing adjustments as capture events Occur 100 Read Rate is represented graphically in A real time as the user makes adjustments to the time delay between image captures The user can control Capture Number of Captures and Number of Symbols using these spin boxes ne Number of Number of Capture Captures Symbols Read Rate E Delay Sec Delay Adjustment 1 078432 O Coarse Medium Decrease Fine lncrease lt b The Delay Adjustment slider allows the user extremely precise control of the time delays between image captures in a read cycle Delay values are shown in seconds in the field above the slider The Coarse and Fine Delay Adjustment options determine whether larger or smaller adjustment increments will be used 4 32 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Ree 5 Parameters Contents COMMUNICATION eee cece ccc ecceeceeceeceeeeecececeueeeeeaecaceaeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeaueeueaeeeeeaeeneeaueneeaeeeeeaeeaesanetaesaeeness 5 2 Read Cycle ac sites csiascesecsesnactanseneensneinasasbenased
104. Flash Mode Good Read Targeting Always Or Green Flash Duration 100 Beeper Good Read LED Configuration ISQUIEC 16022 Grade Final Grade wr Final Grade Symbol Contrast Print Growth Avital Hon Urnitormity Unused ECC Final Grade LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 final grade Symbol Contrast LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Contrast grade Print Growth LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 Print Growth grade Axial Non Uniformity LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 Axial Non Uniformity grade Unused ECC LEDs represent ISO IEC 16022 Unused ECC grade 5 102 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Serial Verification Allows the user to verify configuration command status Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHes Qubpuk Contral Serial Command Echo Status This command is useful in removing any doubt about the imager s interpretation of any configuration command For example if the current preamble is SOM and lt K701 1 START gt is entered the imager will echo back lt K701 SOM gt since the attempted entry START exceeds the four character limit for that command Therefore it is rejected and the existing SOM message is echoed back and remains the preamble message When enabled a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the host with the resultant settings Host gt ost Imager
105. HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX A 68 lt k141 0 gt x BAD LRC NAK lt K141 0 gt a GOOD LRC ACK QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Setup 3 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H imager_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt k imager_TX ACK imager_TX lt K141 A4M gt w HOST_TX ACK QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 69 Setup 4 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK LRC Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX Transfer 2 HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX Protocol Commands 0x21 T 0x3D 0x28 0x29 0x06 0x15 enabled lt K141 0 gt H ACK lt K100 gt n ACK T lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X ACK T Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX HOST_TX imager_TX lt K141 0 gt H ACK lt K100 gt n ACK T lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X timeout reached imager_TX tJ timeout reached imager_TX 6 timeout reached imager_TX tJ timeout reached imager_TX A 70 P QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Polling Mode Data Flow Examples Setup 1 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select Ox1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Tran
106. Imager User s Manual 5 109 I O Parameters Default on Power On When enabled if the EZ Button is held down on power on the imager will default to customer defaults and save for power on This is the same as sending a lt Zrc gt command from ESP s Terminal Default On Power on Enabled Disabled Enabled Load Configuration Database Loads Configuration Database settings to the imager Enabled Disabled Load Contig DE Enabled Save for Power On Saves imager settings for Power On Disabled izabled Save For Power on Enabled 5 110 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters EZ Button Modes Useful for performing multiple repetitive tasks at the work site Allows the user to program each of the EZ Button s 4 positions from a selection of 7 modes Single Beep Hold down button until a single beep is heard and the 20 LED illuminates EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Load Config DE Enabled Save For Power on Disabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps Save for Power on Load New Master Target System Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP
107. Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Target System When the imager reaches this position the targeting pattern appears The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button 5 114 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Status Indicators The side of the QX Hawk features an array of LEDs that indicate various aspects of imager activity Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate Good Read To Qutpuk Active Oz Input Active Controls the operation of the MOD ACT and NET LNK LEDs Note MOD and ACT function as one combined LED as do NET and LNK Status Indicators PHY Activi Bar Graph Oi PHY Activity laze Protocol Activit Disabled When set to Disabled the MOD ACT and NET LNK LEDs are always off Note All green and red LEDs will turn on briefly during power on or reset to confirm that they are functioning PHY Activity If Ethernet is available LNK Solid green when transceiver is linked ACT Blinking green when transceiver detects Tx or Rx activity Otherwise f
108. MICROSCAN QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual P N 83 006800 Rev A Copyright and Disclaimer Copyright 2010 by Microscan Systems Inc ISO 9001 Certified Issued by T V USA All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used Rather than place a trademark symbol at every occurrence of a trademarked name we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support e mail helpdesk microscan com Warranty and Terms of Sale For Standard Warranty information see www microscan com warranty Microscan Systems Inc Renton Headquarters Tel 425 226 5700 800 251 7711 Fax 425 226 8250 Nashua Office Tel 603 598 8400 Fax 603 577 5818 Microscan Europe Tel 011 31 172 423360 Fax 011 31 172 423366 Microscan Asia Pacific Tel 65 6846 1214
109. Microscan s K command format Refer to the Communication section of Appendix E 5 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Port Routing The QX Hawk features a communication system based on Port Routing instead of traditional dedicated serial ports Decisions can be made about the direction and content of communication between ports based on different Data Types Any available port can be used in any combination The fundamental concept of Port Routing is that communication design can be based upon Data Types rather than ports The advantage of this is the ability to map different data types to different ports the user is no longer limited to a Host Port and Aux Port for specific types of input and output Since each port is independent instead of fixed for a particular purpose the imager behaves more like a data switch Primary Secondary Port Routing Primary Secondary Port Routing Command Data Extended Data Te Command Data xtended Data RS232A RS232 A C Database Identifier Output R5232 B R5232 B C Read Duration Output R5422 qm R5422 C Symbology Identifier TCP Port 1 Symbol Data TCP Pott 1 Extended Data TCP Patt 2 Diagnostic Data se os ed Symbol Data Diagnostic Data Diagnostic Data R5232 A RS232A C Service Status M RS232 B V R5232 B RS422 RS422 TCP Pott 1 TCP Pott 1 TCP Port 2 TCP Port 2 Send and Save Send and Save Port Routing Advantages
110. N Status When this field is disabled the imager will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements or perform any special formatting When enabled the imager can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position it must conform to EAN format Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command If EAN status is required the imager will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN format All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command EAN Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active Output Format In Standard the imager will not apply special EAN output formatting options In Application the imager will apply the special EAN output formatting options to decoded EAN conforming symbols Output Format Standard Standard QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 69 Symbologies Application Record Separator Status When enabled an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN output formatting applies Application Record Separator Status Disabled izabled Enabled Application Re
111. ONNGUFANON data unused database index gt Output Filter Enable lt K745 number of filters gt Format Extract Output Index Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Options 1 to 100 Start Location Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Length Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Format Insert Output Index Output Index refers to the database entry to be modified with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building the required output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until the string is complete Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Options 1 to 100 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 59 Serial Commands Length Specifies the length of the user defined character string that will be inserted This function is limited to 4 characters per output index so mult
112. P s Terminal will cold reboot the system starting from Boot Code 7 28 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Static Validation Sending a lt VAL gt command from ESP s Terminal will cause the imager to perform a static validation operation and will output validation results to the Terminal Output Screen Data Matrix validation information is output in the format below in response to the lt VAL gt command Note If the imager fails to decode the Data Matrix symbol a No Read message is displayed I GRADE ISO IEC Symbol Contrast z i 16822 Print Growth H 53 Dx 48 z Dnom 5A z i Dy 42 x Dmax 65 x i Dmin 35 amp i Axial Monuniformity 4 82 havg 4 7 i A Yavgq 4 6 i Unused ECC 34 z Eact TY i D Emax 12 i GRADING Cell Damage 2 oH i Total Read Time 3H ms i Capture Time 7 ms i Locate Time 186 ms i Decode Time 3 ma i Fixe ls Element 4 6 i ECC Level 268 i Matrix Size 16x16 i Quiet Zone PASS i SYMBOL DATA CT 7 HH GHHHHHH81854214 Validation Parameters Symbol Contrast Usage Lets the user know if contrast settings are less than acceptable Definition All the pixels that fall within the area of the test symbol including its required zone will be sorted by their reflectance values to select the darkest 10 and the lightest 10 of the pixels The arithmetic mean of the darkest and the lightest pixels is calculated and the differe
113. P Ports TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K127 TCP Port 1 7CP Port 2 gt Default 2001 Options 1024 65535 TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt Default 2003 Options 1024 65535 RS 232 A Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 21 Serial Commands Extra Symbol Information RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data RS 232 B Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output
114. PINK RED BLUE l 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 l 2 61 000167 01 QX Cordset M12 12 Pin Socket Flying Leads The 61 000167 01 cordset connects to QX Hawk Connectors A and P M and QX 1 Connectors 1 and 3 WHITE BROWN 3000450 GREEN are YELLOW RED BLUE QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 11 Serial Commands Appendix E Serial Commands Note For a list of utility commands such as defaults read rate requests device control options and imager status requests see Serial Utility Commands on page A 64 Communication RS 232 A lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 232 B lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 422 lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Ethernet lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Ethernet TCP Ports lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt Search and Configure Mode lt K128 ESP Search and Configure Mode gt RS 232 A Data Type lt K130 symbo data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 232 B Data Type lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 422 Data Type lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol informa
115. Parameters Symbologies 20 Symbologies Data Matrix ECC O00 status ECC O50 status ECC 080 status EC 100 status ECE 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status OR Code Micro OR Code Aztec Code 10 Symbologies Stacked Symbologies i Composite Symbology Identifier To open nested options 2 ellis single click the Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled The indicates that the setting is the default To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Symbologies settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Symbologies section of Appendix E QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 61 Symbologies Data Matrix Data Matrix ECC 200 Status Enabled ECC O00 Status Disabled ECC 050 Status Disabled ECC 080 Status Disabled ECC 100 Status Disabled ECC 140 Status Disabled ECC 120 Status Disabled ECC 130 Status Disabled ECC 200 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 200 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 200 symbols ECC 000 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 000 symbols Enabled The imager will attempt to decode ECC 000 symbols ECC 050 Status Disabled The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 05
116. REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 73 Protocol Commands Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST _TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Error Condition 3 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX Ox1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX BAD LRC HOST _TX NAK Host rejects bad LRC data Retry Event imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX GOOD LRC Unit sends again HOST TX ACK Host receives data imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix G ASCII Table
117. Retry Event imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX Unit sends again HOST TX ACK Host receives data imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 72 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Setup 2 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data imager_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX LRC imager_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC imager_TX ACK HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX
118. S GS AS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Output at Timeout Determines the Timeout value for output External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSZ A Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Qutouk at ETX CR Output at Timeout 0 200 Seconds 5 34 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Array Communication Modes Array Communication Modes Disabled Source RS232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID 1 Mode Daisy Chain When set to Daisy Chain follows Microscan Daisy Chain protocol Note Daisy Chain can also be autoconfigured by sending the Daisy Chain Autoconfigure serial command Disabled Se 4rray Communication Modes SOUPCE Disabled Daisy Chain ID Status Source Defines the communication port Array Communication Modes Disabled Source R5232 B Daisy Chain ID Status R5777 A Daisy Chain ID 5232 B AS422 TCP Part 1 TCP Port 2 Daisy Chain ID Status When enabled the imager will append a two character prefix to each imager in the array This allows the user to identify which imager sent the data Note Daisy Chain ID will automatically disable Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information and Diagnostics Output for the Source Port Symbol Data Output will be automatically enabled Extra Symbol Information will be automatically enabled and Diagnostics Output will be
119. SP s Terminal interface QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 6 7 Terminal Window Terminal Window s Terminal Click this button to display the Terminal view Copy paste save Type text here to Terminal Type serial find matching text screen commands in the Terminal here window Clear screen ESE ESP Untitled DEAR Fie Modell Options Connect view Terminal Help o o G 9 amp 3 8 EZ Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities sl GS E Find l i C Send Macros listed on this bar Click on Macros arrow to Add Macro Remove Macro or Edit Macro Click on desired y Macro to run Next Row 7 Read Rate decodejsec Read Rate percent EndReadRate Target Pattern On Target Pattern For Help press F1 OX Hawk 1 OXHawk RRESTERIIIIY Point to Point _ The Terminal interface allows the user to send serial commands to the imager by using macros by copying and pasting or by typing commands in the Send text field The Terminal also displays symbol data or information from the imager Right clicking on the Terminal screen displays a menu of additional options 6 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Terminal Find The Find function allows the user to enter text strings to be searched for in the Terminal For example 1 Type ABC into the Find box
120. SYN ETB CAN EM Sus Esc _F5 Gs AS us sP Click Delete to remove characters 5 42 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Trigger The Trigger is the event that initiates a read cycle Note When calibrating the imager or testing read rate the current trigger setting will be disregarded Trigger Mode Serial Data B Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed Trigger Mode Continuous Read Continuous Read is useful in testing symbol readability or imager functions It is not recommended for normal operations In Continuous Read trigger input options are disabled the imager is always in the read cycle and it will attempt to decode and transmit data for every symbol If a single symbol stays within read range for multiple read cycles its data will be transmitted repeatedly until it leaves the read range The imager sends replies to serial commands that require responses when symbol data is transmitted or read cycle timeout is enabled and a timeout occurs Depending on the combination of enabled symbologies and the Threshold Mode setting the imager may take longer than the timeout to process symbol data Trigger Continuous Read z Trigger Filter Duration Continuous Read Leading Edge Continuous Read 1 Output Trailing Edge External Level External Edge Seral Data Seral Data and Edge External Trigger State
121. Trigger Mode This sets all the imagers in the chain to Serial Data when the command is executed Important All secondary imagers must be set to Serial Data Trigger Mode for Daisy Chain to function Before Autoconfigure the primary imager must be set to Serial S gt Primary Secondary Secondary Imager Imager Imager S S S Host 2 Send the lt K150DAISY gt command from ESP s Terminal 3 If necessary set the primary imager to External Edge After Autoconfigure the primary imager can be set to External Edge E but the other imagers must remain in Serial S gt Primary Secondary _ Secondary Imager Imager Imager E S S Host Important If the imager is Ethernet enabled first check to determine if RS 232 B is available If it is available set RS 232 B as the Source port in Array Communication Modes Otherwise set RS 232 A as the Source port Port Routing for Symbol Data Output and Extra Symbol Information will be disabled on the Source port QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 37 Communication Preamble Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters CR Preamble Char
122. a transmitted the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received e In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Mon Delirmited 0x00 NUL Stop Character Won Delimited NUL NUL SOH STX ETX EOT Eng ACK BEL es HT LE f vT DEEE oct De2 Dca Ocal Nak SYN ETB tan Em sue Esc Fs es Eae Click Delete to remove characters 5 50 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Decodes Before Output Decodes Before Output specifies the number of times a symbol needs to be decoded before symbol data is output and a good read is declared Decodes Before Gutput 1 255 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 51 Read Cycle End of Read Cycle The read cycle is the time during which the imager will attempt to decode a symbol A read cycle can be ended by a timeout or a new trigger or a combination of the two End of Read Cycle Mode Timeout Read Cycle Timeout 200 End of Read Cycle Mode Note When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output the imager is always in the read cycle End of Read Cycle CE E Read Cycle Timeout Tee New Trigger Timeout or New Trigger Last Frame Last Frame or Mew Trigger Timeout Typically used with Continuous Read
123. abled Enabled Output On Unused ECC The unused ECC is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value D izabled Dijsabled Qutput on Unused ECC Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 151 I O Parameters Symbol Contrast Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Symbol Contrast grade is under the threshold Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade L w Print Growth Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Print Growth grade is under the threshold Print Growth Threshold Grade C w Axial Non Uniformity Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Axial Non Uniformity grade is under the threshold Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Unused ECC Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Unused ECC grade is under the threshold larade C ka Unused ECC Threshold 5 152 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 3 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The outp
124. ables Narrow Quiet Zone and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power on Serial Command Status Request To ensure that any command was received and accepted send the Show Reader Status command lt gt The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark For example send lt K142 gt to request the status of Postamble Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example To enter a carriage return and line feed M J enter lt K141 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 17 Serial Commands Serial Configuration Commands The following serial commands can be entered through ESP s Terminal to control QX Hawk functions Detailed descriptions of command parameters are available in Parameters Communication RS 232 A lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 232 B lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 422 lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Ethernet lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Ethernet TCP Ports lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt Search and Configure Mode lt K128 ESP Search and Configure Mode gt RS 232 A Data Type lt K130 symbo data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external
125. ack of the unit can be used to receive and bus power and also to send and receive data and commands see Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations for information about grounding the imager correctly QX Hawk Back View A is a serial M12 12 pin plug B is a serial M12 12 pin socket or an Ethernet M12 8 pin socket Output 2 New Master 4 44 3 Default Output 1 a ee p e Sz 1 ie 232 Output 3 6 AAR IN Trigger Ground 7 Input Common 8 N RS 232 RxD Output oini on A Serial M12 12 pin Plug 2 Power RS 422 485 RxD Input 9 RS 232 TxD Common 8 RS 232 RTS 1 Trigger TX 7 Terminated Ground 7 N A Z of OAA 1 70 P RS 232 RxD xa Terminated RS 4221485 5 RS 422 485 s tte 0 RS 232 CTS TxD 44 AE A mae RxD Py J 2 Power Input 1 4 3 Terminated RS 422 485 TxD 3 Terminated B Serial M12 12 pin Socket B Ethernet M12 8 pin Socket 3 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation Grounding the QX Hawk Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety noise reduction and the protection of equipment from voltage transients Buildings including any steelwork all circuits and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes git th tee ME le ee a ge SM Se a te at ae o ode ce et Ot le ag ET HERNET f F vim Ter ote thy fen ee BA us Se ee ee en a
126. acters Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data Preamble Preamble Characters 5 38 Disabled SOH 1 ETX EOT ENO Ack BEL BS HT LF VT FF cR 50 si DLE Dci Dez De3 Dea mak svn ETB CAN EM SUB ESC Fs Gs As us SP Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Postamble Parameters Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the postamble as a Carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters CR Postamble Characters Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data Postamble Postamble Characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Enabled CR LF on CI aR on rs m koa m CI m pam T CI ra 2 CI ha La CI Ja TET YT TR o ts 2R m I alls 7 mm elel a z Click Delete to remove characters 5 39 Read Cycle Read Cycle dTi p B e l pr t Uta i 400 Mode Y z Parameters Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the iF tree control tabs Then click the Read Cycle tab to display the Read Cycle tree control Farameters ESP Val
127. ad Next Symbol as Master Symbol command d Enable the New Master Pin command and activate the discrete input to store the next symbol read as the master symbol QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 163 Matchcode Matchcode Type Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols Note First set Trigger Mode to External Level External Edge or Serial Data Mabchcode Matchcode Type Sequential Matching Match Start Position Match Length Wild Card Disabled izabled Enabled Wild Card Sequential Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Wild Card Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol Note If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Sequential Instructs the imager to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol Instructs the imager to sequence after each match numeric only and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numbers Sequential Matching Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially With Sequential enabled Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending incremental or descending decremental order Matchcode Matchcode Type Disab
128. ad when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled 5 124 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the imager is in a read cycle QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 125 I O Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 1 Parameters Gutput On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width Normally Opern Output Mode Normally Closed Pulse Width Sets the time that the discrete output remains active Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Coen Pulse width 0 500 Seconds Output Mode Pulse Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de acti
129. aee eden oactea 1 4 Sep dinsta Bl cohen sea a eS Se ede en ee eer reer ree eA re 1 5 Step 9 oeleci Modelarea ae nee ne ern ene ea Re ee are rey eae 1 6 DIO CONGO Anea eta thea ie ace pnts ae cca nent whee nates ee a sec a teen ace 1 7 slep Locale SVN DOM asic salee bee 5 eet E a dace ge eee ated 1 9 SEPO Calibra gt Beret er are Nr EIR pC e PC a Ran CR reo aaa 1 11 SIC I Test REAG RAE vex cies as ee usl rt ooett hee aa tial vee teh arn nalts acai aks iets 1 12 Step 10 Conngure he Imagen ccc ae te oth bee th te ie oleracea ch iia T 1 13 Ste Til oae CAM GCS ss causes areata a i a a 1 14 This section explains how to set up and test the QX Hawk quickly using ESP Easy Setup Program Detailed setup information for installing the imager into an application can be found in subsequent sections 1 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Check Hardware Step 1 Check Hardware Item Description Part Number 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager FIS 6800 XXXXG 2 QX 1 Interface Device 98 000103 01 3 QX Cordset Common M12 12 pin Plug to M12 12 pin Socket 1 m 61 000162 01 4 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Plug to DB9 1 m 61 000152 01 5 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Socket to DB9 1m 61 000153 01 6 QX Power Supply M12 12 pin Socket 1 3 m 97 000003 01 7 QX Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug to RJ45 1 m 61 000160 01 8 QX Photo Sensor M12 4 pin Plug NPN Dark On 2 m 99 000020 02 Note Addit
130. ager is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Diagnostics Service Unit Disabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 133 I O Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory B Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read a Output State Mismatch or No Read Pulse width Match or Good Read Output Mode Mismatch Trend Analysis No Read l Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality 4 Diagnostics Diagnostic Warring ln Read Cycle Mismatch or No Read Activates dis
131. al read cycle timing results especially when initially setting up an application to determine maximum line speed obtainable based on spacing between symbols When enabled the duration of the read cycle in milliseconds is appended to the symbol data The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output Important To measure the entire read cycle when in External Level trigger mode set When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle This output can measure over 49 days worth of duration if exceeded the OVERFLOW message will be output in place of the duration Read Duration Output Disabled Separator i Separator User defined character that separates the symbol information from the Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Separator NUL S0H STX ETX EOT ENG ack BeL Bs HT LF vt rE s0 _s pue pen Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 97 I O Parameters Output Indicators Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Good Read Targeting Always On Green Flash Curation 100 Beeper Good Read LED Configuration ISOJET 1602 Grade Final Grade The QX Hawk has a beeper and two LED arrays as follows 1 An array of green LEDs projected from the front of the imager that can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions 2 An array of status LEDs on the side of the imager
132. allows the user to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database Master Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type 5 p Receive Reader s Database send Database to Reader Read Symbol into Selected Indes Set Master Symbol Database Size here Important Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is 3000 changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted except master symbol 1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according the number of master symbols defined from 1 to 10 Master Symbol Maximum Number Characters 1 3000 2 1500 3 1000 4 750 5 600 6 500 7 428 8 375 9 333 10 300 7 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Enter Master Symbol Data Allows the user to enter master symbol data for any enabled master symbol index number 1 to 10 provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum allowed Enter data for 1 to 10 master symbols Caution If no data is entered the existing data will be deleted 1 Open the Utilities menu 2 Set the number of master symbols to be created in Master Symbol Database Size 3 Double click on each master symbol n
133. ame As Bar Code Value o ig Sesemibes the Specify encoded data Add start configuration code cal Create a caption for the symbol that matches or Add end configuration code Save Settings Differences from Default Settings The symbol will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Bar Code Dialog QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Navigating in ESP To change imager settings or to access the Setup Terminal or Utilities views click the App Mode button Pee aor 4op Mode To return to EZ Mode click the EZ Mode button 3 E Mode To make changes to configuration settings in the tree controls Parameters ESP Values Communications S232 4 RS232 B Enabled RS422 Disabled The X Ethernet Enabled indicates 1 Left click on the to expand Protocol Selection Point to Point tat the setting is menu items External Data Routing Disabled default 2 Double click the desired Array Communication Modes Disabled parameter and single click Preamble Disabled in the selection box to view Preamble Characters options Poskamble ir ni 3 Place the cursor in the selection box scroll down 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete the to the desired setting and selection single click the setting _ 5 Right click on the open screen and select Sa
134. an application specific parameter and normally should be configured by the user to meet the requirements of the application The calibration process will optimize the gain setting for the configured shutter speed Camera Note Background color Reverse Video is part of the calibration process regardless of the calibration setup After successful completion of calibration the background color will be set to the appropriate value depending on the calibrated symbol The mirrored image parameter is not part of the calibration process and must be configured appropriately by the user prior to calibration Mirrored Image B Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Margin 75 Gain Disabled The gain is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Enabled The gain will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance Calibration Options EE c2itste v Shutter Speed Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Margin 75 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 117 I O Parameters Shutter Speed Unless an application is a static setup the shutter speed setting should be configured by the user based on their application For dynamic applications the user should configure the shutter spee
135. are two methods to accommodate this task E Calibration Options ain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate al Symbol Type Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Calibrate window of Interest Margin 75 Don t Calibrate The focus position is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Calibrate The focus position will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance This method is a simply Search method that tries to identify the desired focus through a search algorithm that cycles through focus settings with a configuration of camera settings to try and locate as quickly as possible the desired focus This is accomplished when a symbol is decoded Once a focus distance has been located that will successfully decode a symbol the algorithm will fine tune the search to locate the inside and outside focal distances The final focus distance is selected as the focus distance that is in the center of these two values This method can be time consuming if the focus is not found on the 1st pass QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 119 I O Parameters Symbol Type Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate WF Window of Interest Framing Dont Calibrate Window of Interest Margin Calibrate Don t Calibrate Only the current symbologies enabled will be considered during the
136. asbenaesadienendeada NAA Erri T ance KATEN TENE SER bexeeadactnatexszs xeceuesneres 5 40 SVIMDONMOGICS M 5 61 VO Parame CS S enaa E E A een eee 5 93 Symbol Quality reisien Ea anra dane rA EEE EErEE EARE detaesaaduaielduanenedeed ednenbenassoansseawesed laze 5 155 MACHICO lt a nen On SN r a E ee ee eee 5 162 AGN SUNG Se ca csc ce eta esac et akan a ap eet a ead wines cee dahon Gees eta E A aetna cana ndata taetes 5 171 This section explains the function and purpose of the Parameters commands in ESP s tabbed tree controls Important Unless otherwise specified command settings shown in this section are the default settings QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 1 Communication Communication Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs App Mode Then click the Communication tab to display the Communication tree control Sy fees Parameters Parameters ESP Values Communications RS232 A RS232 B Enabled RS422 Disabled Ethernet Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled Preamble Disabled i Se Disabled To open nested options To change a setting double click the single click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Communication settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using
137. atch Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt Matchcode Type Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Wild Card 3 Sequential Sequential Matching Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Increment Options 0 Increment 1 Decrement Match Start Position Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Options 0 to 3000 Match Length Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 1 Options 1 to 3000 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 55 Serial Commands Wild Card Character Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default asterisk Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Sequence on No Read Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequenc
138. atches will return lt X 000000001 gt Mismatch Counter Reset sending lt Y gt sets the Mismatch Counter to 000000000 7 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Device Control Click the Utilities button and then the Device Control Utilities tab to display the Device Control view Fead Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Outputs Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Pulse Estras The Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse and Output 3 Pulse buttons Disable Reader activate the link between the and of the host connector The buttons in the Extras section Disable or Enable Enable Reader the reader Device Control Serial Utility Commands Output 1 Pulse Sending lt L1 gt activates the link between Output 1 and Output 1 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status Output 2 Pulse Sending lt L2 gt activates the link between Output 2 and Output 2 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status Output 3 Pulse Sending lt L3 gt activates the link between Output 3 and Output 3 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status Disable Reader Sending lt I gt will turn the imager OFF end the current read cycle and will not allow the imager to enter another read cycle until turned ON This feature is useful during extended perio
139. ate Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 3 Parameters Dukput On Mismatch Output Skate Normally Open Pulse Width Mormally Open Output Mode Pulse Width Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 3 Parameters Gukput On Mismatch Qutput State Normally Coen Pulse width 0 500 Seconds Output Mode Pulse Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width Soo Output Mode Pulse k Pulse Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pir Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid wi
140. atus This option is not typically used but it can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check character verification An error correcting routine in which the check character character is added Check Character Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Check Character Output Status When enabled a check character character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security Check Character Output Status Disabled izabled Enabled 5 72 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Length 1 Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Important If Range Mode Status is set to Disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 1 or Symbol Length 2 to be considered a valid symbol lf Range Mode Status is set to Enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbol Length 1 0 64 Symbol Length 2 Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Important If Range Mode S
141. atus comma Separator Character OO f NUL SOH STX ETx EOT Eng ACK BEL es HT LE f vT FF cR _so _s1 DLEf Der Dc2 Dca Dca NAK SVN ETB an EM sue Esc _Fs GS RSJ us sP Click Delete to remove characters Supplementals Type As required by symbology used in application Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both Supplementals Type Both we Both Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid Two Digits Only two character supplementals will be considered valid Five Digits Only five character supplementals will be considered valid 5 80 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters UPC E as UPC A When disabled the imager will output the version E symbols in their encoded 6 character format When enabled the imager will format the symbol as either a 12 character UPC A symbol or an EAN 13 symbol depending on the state of the EAN status parameter This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification UFPC E as UFC Disabled i 2g b e d x Enabled 5 81 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Symbologies Code 93 Used in some clinical applications Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology employing four element widths Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white Each character contains thr
142. automatically disabled for the Destination Port Array Communication Modes Disabled SOUrce Ro2s2 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID iea Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 35 Communication Daisy Chain ID The Daisy Chain ID is a two character identifier Array Communication Modes Disabled SOUrCE RS232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID z a z E STX ACK BEL Bs eal al FF cal so _si ove pci DC2 DC3 C4 NAK SYN ETE Can Em supj Esc Fs Gs FS us SP Click Delete to remove characters 5 36 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Daisy Chain Autoconfigure For quick setup of a daisy chain configuration The command to Autoconfigure the daisy chain is sent to the primary imager and the software responds in the following ways e Counts the number of secondary imagers in the daisy chain e Assigns an internal ID number 1 n to each secondary imager where the first secondary imager is number 1 the primary imager s ID being a 0 e Propagates the communication settings and the relevant operating modes of the primary imager to the ports of each secondary imager e Resets each secondary imager e Confirms that each secondary imager has acquired the new settings When setting up a daisy chain operation perform the following steps 1 Set the primary imager the one connected to the host to Serial Data
143. ave occurred since power on or the last No Read Counter Reset command A lt N OVERF_nnn gt will be output if the counter is overflowed nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed 255 times is the maximum Sending lt N gt again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed Example lf the counter is at 999999999 and 3 additional counts have been captured then lt N ERROR gt will be output and the next lt N gt command without any new no reads will return lt N 000000003 gt No Read Counter Reset sending lt O gt sets the No Read Counter to 000000000 Trigger Counter Sending lt T gt displays the total number of triggers that have occurred since power on or the last Trigger Counter Reset command A lt T OVERF_nnn gt will be output if the counter is overflowed nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed 255 times is the maximum Sending lt T gt again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed Example f the counter is at 999999998 and 3 additional counts have been captured then lt T ERROR gt will be output and the next lt T gt command without any new triggers will return lt T 000000002 gt Trigger Counter Reset Sending lt U gt sets the Trigger Counter to 000000000 Good Read Match Counter Sending lt V gt displays either 1 the total number of decodes that match the master symbol or 2 the total number of good reads The count begins fr
144. awk EGRREGTERII Point to Point COMI For Help press F1 5 159 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Locate Tab The Locate tab allows the user to determine the position of the symbol within the imager s field of view and to optimize the imager s camera settings for symbol quality evaluation EP ESP Untitled Sle Fie Model Options Connect View Help SS xvoy hbgn Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Communication Read Cycle Symbologies 1 amp Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values Bch Locate Bictarsames Show Tree Control ee Symbol Quality E Global Total Read Time Disabled Calibrate Symbol Quality Separator yn i Click the Locate Click the Calibrate B Data Matrix B ISQVIEC 16022 Parameters seni r play the button to optimize Se ee camera settings Symbol Contrast f s field of vi Frint Growth Imager s field OT VIEW Axial Non uniformity S Unused ECC Disabled El Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled wt B For Help press F1 Ox Hawk 1 OX Hawk EGRIREGTERIII Point to Point COMI 115 2K M
145. ay Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 19 Communication Search and Configure Mode Search and Configure Mode is intended for troubleshooting and test purposes The Ethernet PHY should be able to operate in fully automatic mode at all times None of this command s parameters are saved in NOVRAM All parameters are set to default on power on A Reset lt A gt is required for settings to take effect Search and Configure Mode Enabled s Disabled Enabled Timed Window Enabled When enabled Search and Configure Mode will find the imager and settings can be changed Timed Window When Timed Window is selected Search and Configure Mode will find the imager and settings can be changed but only 60 seconds from the last reset After 60 seconds Search and Configure Mode will be disabled 5 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Protocol Selection In general the point to point protocols will work well in most applications They require no address and must use RS 232 or RS 422 communication standards Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the imager and the host or in the case of Multidrop between the imagers and a concentrator Note In all protocol modes the Preamble and Postamb
146. ay be defined e In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received e In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Serial Trigger Character Delimited La FP Stark Character Hon Delimited Stop Character Mon Delimited z FE sE a m E C l ekg Bekk alg eg aE BEBE sa BE ig Click Delete to remove characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 49 Read Cycle Stop Character Non Delimited Useful in applications where different characters are required to end a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Stop characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Stop trigger characters the following rules apply e In External Edge the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined e In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol dat
147. b to display the Diagnostics tree control Parameters Parameters ESP Values Diagnostics Hours Since Reset Read only Hours T Minutes T F Service Message oe Jah Disabled is the eu Service Message Threshold Enabled Resolution Seconds User Defined Mame gs HAWE To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options To open nested options single click the Note Matchcode settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Diagnostics section of Appendix E 5 171 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Diagnostics Hours Since Reset Read only Used as a troubleshooting tool that can help pinpoint the cause of a reset Records the number of hours and minutes of operation since the last system reset Hours Since Reset Read only Hours T Minutes T Hours 16 bit counter that increments every 60 minutes Range 0 to 23 hours Minutes 16 bit counter that increments every 60 seconds Range 0 to 59 minutes 5 172 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Service Message Status When Enabled a Service Message of up to 128 characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service time has expired Service Message Status Disabled Service Message Disabled Threshold Enabled Resolution Seconds Service Message Allows the
148. bled Dijsabled Qutput on Unused ECC Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 141 I O Parameters Symbol Contrast Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Symbol Contrast grade is under the threshold Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade L w Print Growth Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Print Growth grade is under the threshold Print Growth Threshold Grade C w Axial Non Uniformity Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Axial Non Uniformity grade is under the threshold Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Unused ECC Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Unused ECC grade is under the threshold larade C ka Unused ECC Threshold 5 142 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 2 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning co
149. bles Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 113 I O Parameters Four Beeps Hold down button until four quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 60 and 80 LEDs illuminate EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Load Config DE Enabled Save For Power on Disabled Single Beep Target System Two Beeps Calibrate Three Beeps Read Rate Save for Power on ka Disabled Read Rate Calibrate Save for Power on Load Hew Master Target System Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibrate Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal
150. bol length setting before it can be considered a good read The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 1 2710 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 87 Symbologies Codeword Collection Codeword Collection Single Image s Single Image Multiple Image Single Image The imager will attempt to decode the PDF417 symbol only from the information provided in a single image Multiple Image The imager will process codewords from multiple images within the same read cycle and combine them to decode a single PDF417 symbol 5 88 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters MicroPDF417 Used for labelling small items that need large data capacity A variant of PDF417 a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol Micro POF 417 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Fixed Symbol Length Status When Enabled the imager will reject any MicroPDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled DES n Cm Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted When enabled the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain
151. ce from the front of the camera to the object being viewed In optics the distance from the lens to the focal plane Focal Plane Usually found at the image sensor it is a plane perpendicular to the lens axis at the point of focus Focus Any given point in an image at which light converges the focal point FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array Frame The total area captured in an image sensor while the video signal is not blanked Frame Grabber A device that interfaces with a camera and on command samples the video converts the sample to a digital value and stores that in a computer s memory Front End System The object illumination optics and imager blocks of a vision system Includes all components useful to acquire a good image for subsequent processing Full Duplex A communications system in which signals can travel simultaneously between devices Gain The amount of energy applied to pixel gray scale values prior to output expressed in dB optimal signal strength Good Read A decode The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a bar code symbol Gradient The rate of change of pixel intensity first derivative Gray Scale Variations of values from white through shades of gray to black in a digitized image with black assigned the value of zero and white the value of one A 82 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Half Duplex A
152. ceanannce 2 16 This section explains the basic structure and elements of ESP Easy Setup Program When ESP is opened unless otherwise specified in ESP Preferences the EZ Mode view will appear App Mode contains several tree controls Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics a Setup interface a Terminal interface and a Utilities interface ESP can be used to configure the QX Hawk in three different ways e Graphic User Interfaces Imager settings can be configured using such point and click tools as buttons spin boxes check boxes and drag and drop functions e Tree Controls Each tree control contains a list of all command settings that pertain to that specific area of imager operation Each parameter can be configured using dropdown menus or fields where characters can be entered e Terminal ESP s Terminal allows the user to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the imager by typing them in the provided field Information about using specific commands in ESP is provided in subsequent sections For ESP system requirements see Minimum System Requirements in Chapter 1 Quick Start QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 1 EZ Mode EZ Mode EZ Mode allows the user to test read rate and calibrate the imager After connecting to the imager the EZ Mode view will appear On screen instructions assist the user with positioning testing and calib
153. ceive Settings creates a condition In which Auto Sync will not automatically send imager settings to ESP or send ESP settings to the imager Show Target Pattern During Locate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Locate routine Show Target Pattern During Calibrate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Calibrate routine Use Higher Quality Images Sets ESP to output images at a higher resolution than standard JPEG format Open Image after Save When Open Image after Save is enabled ESP automatically opens saved image captures Images can be saved from the Evaluation tab in the Camera view or by right clicking an image in any other image capture view and then saving Send XON with Autoconnect Sends an XON Begin Transmission command to the imager before starting the Autoconnect routine QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 9 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Advanced Tab cont Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting When enabled prompts the user to save a esp file when ending a session i P Save changes to session Desp o cme The esp file will be saved in the location specified by the user My Documents BER Fie Edt wiew Favorites Tools Help Erd Links pack hi P a Search oy Folders EBk Address E My Documents a eC Folders x Mame Size Type i Desktop E session 3 esp 6KE ESP Document
154. characters are displayed with more detailed formatting Change Keyboard Macros Clicking the Change Keyboard Macros button brings up the Function Keys dialog In this dialog select the Pree ref rs ee Fr Fa rs Fio en F desired function key and then enter the macro keystrokes in the associated key map For example to make Ctrl F2 the keystroke to send a trigger character select F2 then in the Ctrl row enter lt trigger character gt and click OK Then whenever the Ctrl F2 keystroke is pressed the trigger character will start the read cycle ey Map ey F2 Clear Key Clear All Keys Alt Shift Ctrl Note The F1 key is reserved for opening ESP Help and the F3 key is reserved for the Find Next function Change Font Allows the user to modify the font used for decode data received from the imager on the Terminal Change Echo Font Allows the user to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal Enable Echo Allows the user to enter command characters in Terminal Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus When Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus is enabled data from the imager will continue to appear in the Terminal even when ESP is not the top window QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 7 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Bar Code Options Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Gar Code Uptions Advanced Sizing Information Bar width
155. cidental triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the trailing edge is filtered such that on the falling edge the state must be held for the trigger filter duration before the trigger will be deemed inactive Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 0 010048 lt Seconds External Trigger State Active Closed External Trigger State Allows users to select the trigger polarity that will be used in their application Determines the active state of the trigger signal applied to the cable input of the imager Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed Acte Clozed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 47 Read Cycle Serial Trigger Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle A serial trigger is considered an online host command and requires the same command format as all host commands It must be entered within angle bracket delimiters lt and gt or in the case of non delimited triggers it must define individual start and stop characte
156. cnnssotertecscdsceleccsseaiendensndubnsgecuncused uted odsvedseedesentiteasneneteds 7 21 Eo EN e1 a AA ANE A A cree tes unc E EE E oan E E E E E AA A E E 7 22 LEAS SAC a a E E 7 23 ae UG a a E A a E O A A 7 25 Leanni Opera UON creases asec src scct aces a e teeta ec ative ten aoc ceseuence end atene a eeGandsentoenen aac 7 27 Rapor yS oean a E eee ee ne ee ee ee ee ee eee nee ee ere 7 28 State V ANG AUIOM sos sca sinss cee Seine Eia E E EEEE ES 7 29 TWO SUING duttecsssstanercatantnncarensnseieniads tanta E A T seas E 1 31 TEMPETE sonis n eb scetssag eee EONO ENN R aE i ES 1 32 Y Modem Transfer Options ccccceeccccceececeeecceceeceesaueesseeeeeeeeeceseeeceeseeceeseeeeeseeeessaeeetsaeeetsaees 7 33 This section explains the function and purpose of serial utility commands which are generally performed during imager operation QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 1 Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands Note For a list of all K commands see Serial Commands on page A 12 Type Command Name Bar Code Configuration Enter Bar Code Configuration Calibration lt CAL gt Calibrate lt OPTIC gt Initiate Lens Calibration lt N gt No Read Counter lt O gt No Read Counter Reset lt T gt Trigger Counter Coana lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset lt V gt Good Read Match Counter lt W gt Good Read Match Counter Reset lt X gt Mismatch Counter lt Y gt Mis
157. code Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Forward Options 0 Forward 1 Reverse A 44 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 400 Options 1 to 65535 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 45 Serial Commands GS1 DataBar RSS DataBar Omnidirectional RSS 14 Serial Cmd lt K482 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar Limited RSS Limited Serial Cmd lt K483 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status DataBar Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length DataBar Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 14 Options 1 to 74 MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0
158. code Settings In addition if combined with Output Filtering the user can order the output of decoded symbols in a captured image frame by their location in the Field of View Multiple Symbols with Same Symbol Data Operation ROI can be used to decode more than one of the same symbols and treat them as different symbols Multi Symbol Operation will work within the following rules e Multiple symbols of same symbol data can only be handled by using ROI mode This can only be done between different ROI IP Region settings e ROI IP Region settings within the database must be sequential Not Interlaced in order to correctly know when a new region has been tried If Database slot 2 and 3 are swapped the imager would then treat them as 4 separate ROI regions This would result in 4 different symbols with GDR of 1 instead of 2 different symbols with GDR count of 2 e ROI Regions will count the same symbol in the same region as additional decodes but only spanning multiple frames Each decode of same symbol with same ROI will add to the GDR count with additional frames e Multiple symbols can be within each ROI Region but cannot identify multiple Same Symbols If same symbol is in a ROI twice per frame then it will be counted as 1 decode or 1 more GDR count the second will be ignored e Filtering can only be done with database because all other data is same QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 23 Ordered Output Ordered Outp
159. commands 1 Click the Master Database tab Enable Matchcode Type Set the Master Symbol Database Size Select the database index in which the master symbol will be entered Do one of the following to enter master symbol data a Double click the index row to type data directly into the index b Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol 0O A ON Set Master Symbol Loads the next symbol decoded Database Size here into the selected index Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Master Symbol Database Size Matchoode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 z Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Header Saves the database to Master Symbol Data the i e imager Master Symbol 1 g Master Symbol 2 Loads the imager s saved Master Symbol 3 master symbols into ESP Master Symbol 4 y i Master Symbol 5 Double click a row to enter data into popup text box Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database i limited changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will r allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master spmbols to be deleted See manual for details QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 11 Master Database Master Symbol Database Size Master Symbol Database Size
160. cord Separator Character This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output Application Record Separator Character NUL SOH ST ET EOT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF cR so si DLE Dc1 Dc2 De3 Dca Nak SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS Gs fs us SP Click Delete to remove characters Application Record Brackets If an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output Application Record Brackets Disabled Disabled Enabled Application Record Padding This feature causes the imager to pad variable length application fields with leading zeroes This is not done for the last field of a symbol Application Record Padding Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 70 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters BC412 BC41 Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Check Character Output Status Disabled The imager will strip the verified check digit from the symbol data Enabled The imager will format the verified check digit as part of the symbol data amp BC412 Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled we Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled The imager will accept any
161. crete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled 5 134 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the imager is in a read cycle QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 135 I O Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or No Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width Normally Open Output Mode Pulse Width Sets the time in 10 ms
162. cter calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to Both the imager will perform both the Mod 16 and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol If the symbol does not pass either calculation it will not be decoded Check Character Type Disabled 5 76 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Check Character Output Status When this field is disabled and a check character calculation is enabled the imager will strip the verified check character from the symbol data output This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used When enabled the imager will output the check character as part of the symbol data This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used Check Character Output Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 77 Symbologies UPC EAN Used primarily in point of sale applications in the retail industry It is commonly used with Microscan imagers in applications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging UPC Universal Product Code is a fixed length numeric continuous symbology UPC can have two or five digit supplemental data following the normal symbol The UPC Version A UPC A symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number The first digit i
163. cycle ACC Colololololololo sae ooooe4a4soo0050 a cae 9 a a cme a om oY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 A B C D E F lt K gt All Status Request This is the fastest way to learn the imager s current configuration Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Descriptor Request This request will return all current descriptors for every K command starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Range Request This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user defined range starting with the lowest user defined K command value and ending with the highest user defined K command value QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 25 Imager Status lt Knnn gt Single Status Request This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Request This request returns the basic functional description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnn gt Single Range Request This request will return the value range and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnnd
164. d as the frame size would have to be increased to account for the sub sampling Top Left Height Width The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Symbol Type This field allows the user to configure the database to operate on specific symbol types for selected database index Symbol type specific parameters must be configured with the appropriate symbol type command For example fixed length Code 128 is required it must be set up with the Code 128 command lt K474 gt To configure a symbol type simply add the number value associated with the symbol type to the field parameter Example If Data Matrix and Code 39 are required the parameter would be 2 16 18 Disabled When disabled the database uses the current Symbol Type setup to determine active symbol types Any Type All of the preceding symbol types except Pharmacode are enabled while this database index is being used 4 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Data Matrix If enabled Data Matrix will be active for this database index Important The ECC Level must be configured using the Data Matrix command lt K479 gt If no ECC level has been configured then it will not decode a Data Matrix symbol QR Code If enabled QR Code will be active for this database index Code 128 If enabled Code 128 will be active for thi
165. d held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 137 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 2 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 2 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches
166. d Kaa Sha cee ee oO A oe Ht ge ee tats DEVICE F d p EE BOWERS o Seo g Sem Bee ey ee a iea a Boy So oe se eee SUPPLY o a a O aa ee A ia a N O RS232 422 485 DEVIGE s m ats An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the imager Ground Loops Ground loops signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host imager and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 3 5 QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation SCANNER INTERFACE In Line Filtering SF Shunt Filtering POWER RETURH EARTH 3 TERMIHAL POWER SUPPLY POWER 2 TERMINAL POWER E POWER GHD s CHASSIS GHD POWER RETURH SUPPLY EARTH local to power source connected to RETURN at main power panel COMM SGHLS SIGHAL GHD IF CONDUCTIVE MOUNTING BRACKET IS GROUNDED TO EARTH POTENTIAL THEN POTENTIAL MUST BE SAME AS EARTH AT POWER SOURCE MOUNTING BRACKET Grounding Notes e Ensure that mounting bracket Earth is at the same potential as power source Earth e Supply Return and Earth ground must be stable low impedance reference points e 2 Terminal Power Supply must still provide an Earth connec
167. d Read Cycle Object 2 moving in front of the detector beam causes another gt jd change in the trigger state This sig Object nal initiates a new read cycle and se ends the previous read cycle unless detector i Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occured This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing object size or read cycle timeouts are consistent External Edge as with Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received However the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle The read cycle ends with a good read output or depending on the End of Read Cycle Mode setting a timeout or new trigger occurs QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 45 Read Cycle Serial Data Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred In Serial Data the imager accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger Serial commands are entered inside angle brackets as shown here lt n gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however
168. d of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle is useful in timing based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time that it is decoded Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger Start of read cycle End of read cycle Read cycle duration Host This is when host activates trigger expects output QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 95 I O Parameters No Read Message Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification When enabled and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle the No Read message will be transmitted to the host No Read Message Enabled Message MOREAD No Read Message Status Disabled Only symbol data is output after a read cycle Enabled When the imager is in a triggered mode a No Read message will be appended for each failed read attempt Message Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message Note No Read Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Data Output is set to Match Mismatch or Good Read No Read Message can be set to any ASCII character No Read Message Foahled Message NORE AD 5 96 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Read Duration Output Useful in evaluating actu
169. d of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Data Bits Eight Eight Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Symbol Data Output Enabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager Diagnostics Oukput E nabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 5 Communication External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the imager Note Command processing is always enabled for RS 232 A Data Data enables RS 232 A as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 6 QX
170. d setting so the calibration process can optimize the gain for that setting The following table illustrates a general guide line for shutter speed configurations for various line speeds Note This is a general guide line and depends on the scanners optical configuration and symbol element size Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Calibrate Fast shutter Window of Interest Margin 75 Don t Calibrate The shutter speed is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Calibrate The shutter speed will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance Calibrate Fast Shutter The calibration process will concentrate on achieving the fastest possible shutter setting that still will still have good performance The image quality or contrast may not be as good as what would be achieved with the Enabled setting The calibration process is not designed to choose the fastest shutter speed that can decode a symbol but rather to optimize for the fastest shutter speed that still provides good image quality 5 118 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Focus Position Since the focus can be configured by simply entering the target distance value from the imager normally the user will configure the focus without requiring calibration However if it is necessary to calibrate the focus distance there
171. d symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 Status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 EAN 128 Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Output Format Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Application QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 41 Serial Commands Application Record Separator Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474
172. d the 20 40 and 60 LEDs illuminate EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Load Config DE Enabled Save For Power on Disabled Single Beep Target System Two Beeps Calibrate Read Aate ka Four Beeps izabled Read Rate Calibrate Save for Power on Load New Master Target System Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibrate Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Target System When the imager reaches this position the targeting pattern appears The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled Bar Code Configuration Ena
173. de Config Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis Mode Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 1 No Read Options 0 Mismatch 1 No Read 2 Decodes per Trigger Trigger Evaluation Period Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Number to Output On Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Decodes per Trigger Threshold Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 A 52 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Trend Analysis Output 2 Serial Cmd lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Diagnostics Output 1 Service Unit Serial Cmd lt K790 service unit gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostics Output 2 Serial Cmd lt K791 service unit gt Diagnostics Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K792 service unit gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 53 Serial Commands Output
174. ds of time when no symbols are being decoded or the imager is being configured Disabling the imager will not affect any commands that have already been downloaded Enable Reader sending lt H gt will turn the imager ON and allow it to enter read cycles QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 9 Differences from Default Differences from Default Utilities Click the Utilities button and then the Differences tab to display the Differences from Default view Clicking the Differences from Default button will cause ESP to check all stored configuration settings and compare them to default settings All settings that are different than default will appear in the left column shown below and descriptions of those settings will appear in the right column Click this button for a list of ESP Click Generate Barcode to display the Bar Code configuration settings that are Dialog Then create configuration symbols containing different than default settings the required configuration commands I Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences from Default Differences Waster Database Firmware Generate Bar Code Command lt K200 35 gt lt K220 50 gt tkrh gt lt K810 3 lt K811 1 kol 2 2 gt Description Mode External Edge Read Cycle Timeout 50 Code 128 Edge to Edgel Output On No Read Output On Good Read M atch Output On Mi
175. ds will be saved to the imager whenever a Save to Reader command is sent or when an lt A gt or a lt Z gt command is sent Also if there is a corresponding ESP menu item the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command 1 From the Send Recv button or by right clicking in any blank section of a tree control view QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 17 Send Receive Options 2 18 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual E 3 Hardware Integration Contents ELAINE E go Pee E Nee ee ne we ee es E vc ee E A TO ee a rv ee Tere 3 2 COIS CS ira acne te carck een tines a E pee meee cette ee E E 3 3 QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and PiINOUtS 0 0 0 cece c cece eeeeeeeeseueeeueeeeeueeeueeeeueaueaeeeeeeaueneees 3 4 POWer and TMoger SWItCMING taicc2esceretasets oe tienen E EE E Ria A 3 8 E gt OWES OUMUIIA ssa Ania tee cesitch wea euta ou guint alnntevcea a A a ns Bie scen N E 3 9 PAD OIC ATION EXI MPIO S ase secant e a a a an sansa seen E NETA 3 10 This section introduces the details of QX Hawk hardware and explains how that hardware can be integrated in an application 3 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Connectors Connectors Industrial cabling and connectivity schemes must be able to withstand environmental extremes of heat cold and moisture and be secure enough not to be disconnected or damaged inadvertently in the course of day to day operation The current in
176. dustry standard for connectivity is a sealed circular connector such as the M12 The International Electrotechnical Commission IEC standard for M12 connectors describes them as fixed and free screw locking connectors This type of connector is widely available off the shelf from manufacturers such as Turck Lumberg Phoenix Contact Molex or Binder The QX Hawk uses sealed circular connectors with Ultra Lock technology Ultra Lock connectors are more resistant to harsh industrial conditions and are easy to connect Ultra Lock Connectors Microscan has adopted Ultra Lock connectivity because of speed ease of use and ingress protection considerations The main advantage of the Ultra Lock system is that only two steps are required at every connection point 1 Align the connector and receptacle keys 2 Push the connector into place Do not twist the connector as this can bend the pins Ultra Lock connectors are operator independent This means that they are not subject to under tightening or over tightening both of which are common problems with screw down connectors and both of which undermine the moisture resistant seal ULTRA LOCK s RADIAL SEAL A UNDER TIGHTENING f OVER TIGHTENING Operator independent Axial Compression Seal Axial Compression Seal Reliable watertight is incomplete allowing can become damaged constant pressure seal moisture to penetrate so moisture can enter and create shorts Ultra Lock Con
177. e In the case of External Level a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger Timeout or New Trigger Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle For example if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout except that a timeout or a new trigger whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Last Frame Useful in applications in which the timeout duration varies Last Frame or New Trigger Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new object could appear before the last frame in the sequence Last Frame or New Trigger is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame whichever occurs first ends the read cycle QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 53 Read Cycle Read Cycle Timeout Read Cycle Timeout determines the duration of the read cycle End of Read Cycle Mode Timeout Read Cycle Timeout 2 000 Seconds 5 54 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Capture Mode Capture mode specifies how multiple captures are taken and managed throughout a read cycle Eb Capture Mode Continuous Number of Captures F apid Capture Rapid Capture Mode Continuous Rapid Capture In a rapid capture mode one or multiple captures can tak
178. e Read Rate percent Macro Value C p gt Cancel Edit the macro value or type a new Macro Name in the text field provided and define it in the Macro Value field Click OK to save the entry QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 6 5 Terminal Window Menus Terminal Window Menus Right click on the Terminal window to display the following menu Copy Paste Clear Select All Save Change Font Change Echo Font j Enable Echo j Change Background Color F Mon Printable Characters Copy selected text to clipboard Paste from Terminal or other text Clear all text in Terminal window Select All text in the Terminal window Save brings up a Save As dialog Change Font of text in Terminal brings up a Font dialog aE Echo Font to change typed text brings up a Font ialog Enable Echo enables Echo text typed by user Change Background Color of Terminal window Non Printable Characters allows the user to hide non printable characters or to show them in Standard or Enhanced format e Default Settings returns all the above settings to default Default Settings keyboard Macros Keyboard Macros allows the user to create new keyboard macro commands that can be sent from function keys F2 F4 F5 etc Terminal Dropdown Menu The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text Save Current Text Send File Find Next and Find Previous functions as well as the same functions defin
179. e Data can be routed in on one port and out on the same port or a different port like a switch or router Transparent Mode Half Duplex Mode Full Duplex Mode and Custom Mode e External Data Routing still follows the To From Host Aux paradigm The new capability allows the customer to define the data direction which port behaves as the Host Port and which port behaves as the Aux Port e Only one daisy chain setup required per system e Minimal configuration required for each port with similar items grouped together QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 3 Communication RS 232 A The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 232 formatting RSZ 4 Baud Rate 115 2 Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Mone Hone Odd Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the en
180. e on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Master Symbol Database Size Serial Cmd lt K224 number of master symbols gt Default 1 Options 1 to 10 New Master Pin Serial Cmd lt K225 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Master Symbol Index Serial Cmd lt K231 index master symbol data gt Options 1 to 32768 Master Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K231 index master symbol data gt Options Any valid ASCII string Match Replace Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 56 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Replacement String Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default MATCH Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Mismatch Replace Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default MISMATCH Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 5 Serial Commands Diagnostics Hours Since Rese
181. e pins Important Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional imagers in the daisy chain RS 232 e Connect the Serial Communication Cable from A on the QX Hawk to 2 on the QX 1 e Connect the host cable from 1 on the QX 1 to the host computer e Connect the photo sensor to T on the QxX 1 e Connect the power supply to 3 on the QX 1 e Plug in the power supply Ethernet Note The QX Hawk does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 e Connect the Ethernet Cable from B on the QX Hawk to the network e Connect the photo sensor to T on the QxX 1 e Connect the power supply to A on the QX Hawk e Plug in the power supply TM ts 0 0 Host Serial 12 pin Socket to DB9 Common Common 12 pin Plug 12 pin Plug Host to 12 pin Socket to 12 pin Ethernet 8 pin Socket Plug to RJ45 Power Supply 12 pin Socket F3 fe os L 2 A J 4 O N i it gt 4 et P lt Photo Sensor Serial Standalone with QX 1 Power Supply 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor Ethernet Standalone with Qx 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager Use
182. e status gt Default 6 Options 0 to 128 Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 39 Serial Commands EAN Status Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Supplementals Status UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Separator Status UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status
183. ection Status Connection B Broadcom 440x 10 100 Integrated Duration 1 day 07 29 28 Speed 100 0 Mbps This connection uses the following items v 3 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks JZ QoS Packet Scheduler M Intemet Protocol TCP IP i Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected V Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity 6 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog will appear Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties f General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address x IP address Select Use the following IP address to set i216 0101 the IP Address Subnet and Gateway Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Prefered DNS server Altemate DNS server A 78 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix Interface Standards Interface Standards established by the Electronic Industries Association EIA specify such things as the signaling voltage levels
184. ed When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibrate Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Target System When the imager reaches this position the targeting pattern appears The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button 5 112 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Three Beeps Hold down button until three quick beeps are heard an
185. ed Circuit ASIC An integrated circuit that is customized for a particular kind of use rather than general use All vision system elements including firmware can be integrated into one ASIC Architecture The hardware organization of a vision system designed for high speed image analysis ASIC See Application Specific Integrated Circuit Aspect Ratio The ratio between the height and width of a sensor or display Found by dividing the vertical number of pixels height by the horizontal number of pixels width leaving it in fractional format Automatic Gain Control AGC Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the distance between a reader and symbol Auxiliary Port RS 232 connection to an auxiliary terminal or device for remote viewing Blooming A situation in which too many photons are being produced to be received by a pixel The pixel overflows and causes the photons to go to adjacent pixels Blooming is similar to overexposure in film photography except that in digital imaging the result is a number of vertical and or horizontal streaks appearing from the light source in the picture Baud Rate The number of discrete signal events per second bits per second Capture The act of acquiring and storing video images in an imager or host computer Also the image captured CCD See Charge Coupled Device A 80 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual
186. ed above Terminal Capture Text Save Current Text Change Font Change Echo Font Disable Echo Change Background Color Mon Printable Characters Default Settings Find Nex F3 e Capture Text allows the user to append data in real time to a text file While in operation the text file cannot be opened Pause interrupts the capture flow and Stop ends the flow and opens the file e Save Current Text saves all text in the Terminal window to a text file e Find Next searches for a user defined section of text in the Terminal e Find Previous operates in the same way as Find d Next but searches backward through Terminal text Find Previous ShiFE F3 Keyboard Macros QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual E Utilities Contents Serial Utility COMMANAS ceccccceseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeessaeeeesseeeeeeeaseeseeessageeeees 1 2 In ere 0 lg 2 ee oe a eA ee een ee eee ee eee 1 4 CO I aaa cae a ce stag a steeple stn enclose lade E done acu ead eens 7 6 VCS CI aera cacti a a a aters cee veo eskees tind saa tinea teas aca ad dada aes eae a 7 9 Differences from DSLAM cic catia dncdenasaidnddasideandaceazednacncansacdesieeradeavsnadenardedaaeddessanasseaesecubencexnacedi es 7 10 Master Me AA lS aise eda neces cies scenes EA EARNER ERE EEA EERE a aE AEA 7 11 Bh ce area cee em E A E EEE oid deca N A S E E E E E AE S 7 17 Bar Code Configuration Mode vivresesesisteecdes
187. ee bars and three spaces Code 93 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Symbol Length 10 Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled the imager will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the imager will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn t match the fixed symbol length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Djsabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared Symbol Length 10 1 54 5 82 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Pharmacode Used mostly in pharmaceutical packaging Encodes up to five different numbers each with its own color which may be entered in decimal or binary format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar Bar width is independent of height In decimal format each part can be up to 999 999 In binary format each input can have up to 19 ones and zeros B Pharmacode Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Symbol Length 5 Minimum Bars 2 Bar Width Status Mixed Direction Forward Fixed Threshold Value 10 Background Color white Important When Pharmacode is enabled other linear symbologies will not decode properly Disable Pharmacode before reading other linear symbologies Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the imager will check the symbol lengt
188. efer to the Matchcode section of Appendix E 5 162 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Overview of Matchcode Matchcode allows the user to store master symbol data in the imager s memory compare that data against other symbol data and define how symbol data and or discrete signal output will be directed A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols Note Matchcode will function with multiple symbols however if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Matchcode is used in applications to sort route or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section For example a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol Steps for Entering and Using Master Symbols 1 Set Trigger Mode to External Level External Edge or Serial Data 2 Choose the method of symbol comparison that fits the application 3 Define the type of output required with Matchcode setup a Symbol data output b Discrete output 4 Select the number of master symbols required 5 Decide how the master symbol s will be entered a Use ESP to type master symbol data directly b Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of lt K231 master symbol data gt c Send a lt G gt Re
189. en at an interval specified by the time delay between captures parameter In this mode the only limiting time factor is the integration and transfer timing Continuous Capture In continuous capture mode captures are continually taken throughout the read cycle in a multi buffered format so that we start processing the first image while we are capturing the second Continuous capture mode will override the pre processing field this improves performance in the multi buffered format This mode operation as laser scanners have historically operated with captures spanning the entire read cycle duration until an exit condition occurs such as qualification or timeout Number of Captures Specifies the number of captures to process in the rapid capture mode This parameter is used in conjunction with the time delay between captures parameters to specify the capture sequence of a rapid capture read cycle B Capture Mode Continuous Number of Captures Rapid Capture Mode Timed Capture ah 1 64 Dependent on image size Rapid Capture Mode B Capture Mode Continuous Number of Captures 1 Rapid Capture Mode Timed Capture Timed Capture Triggered Capture Timed Capture Capture events are controlled by the timing values entered in the Capture Time command QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 55 Read Cycle Triggered Capture When set to trigger captures mode the imager operates in the following manne
190. en enabled the imager will try to decode a main and a supplemental However if a supplemental is not decoded the main will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required When set to Required both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read or a single No Read condition results For example if Supplementals is set to Required Separator is enabled and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character Then the data is displayed as MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL Note Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol Note If additional symbols other than the main or supplemental will be read in the same read cycle Number of Symbols should be set accordingly Separator Status Allows users to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols A character can be inserted between the standard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required Separator Status Disabled izabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 79 Symbologies Separator Character As required by the application Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Note Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma sending a lt K473 s gt command from ESP s Terminal will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator st
191. ens Model 45 degree Distance Units Defines the measurement unit value of the Focal Distance parameter Required Focal DistanceDistance Units millimeter 0 Distance Units 1 00 inch 1 Focus Distance 20 Distance Units Millirneters rorn ol Lens Model Milimeters mm Inches 4 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Lens Model This value must reflect the correct camera lens currently installed on the product This value is properly configured after leaving factory However since the lens can be changed by the user this parameter needs to be updated to reflect the currently installed lens To verify lens type turn off power to the QX Hawk do not look into the targeting laser Then look at the outer rim of the unit s camera lens The following markings define the correct Lens Type parameter value and 15 Lens Type 1 lt and 30 Lens Type 2 a and 45 Lens Type 3 When a lens is changed on the QX Hawk the user can optimize the accuracy of the Focal Distance parameter by using the lt OPTIC gt command This parameter is sticky Once saved with a lt Z gt or lt Zc gt command it can only be defaulted with lt Zrdall gt or lt K525d gt Focus Distance o0 Distance Units Milimeters ror Lens Model 45 degree ka 30 degree 45 degree QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 Camera Setup Sub Sampling The camera
192. er s read rate and at any time and to decodes per second and also decode the symbol data displays decoded symbol data Similar to the Capture in the field at the bottom of the and Decode function in screen Click Stop to end the the Configuration views Test routine Lee ee rO Decodes per Second Contrast 901 mm Attribute i Po Clicking this icon enables the Number of Symbols A ee focal distance slide control to symbol 1 than the default contrast a aon n OE oR ack value he focal distance value is symbol Data displayed just below the icon When Decodes per Second is checked Symbol data and the read rate test displays how many Test results are decodes the imager achieves each second shown in this field instead of displaying a percentage 4 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Camera Setup Lh Click the App Mode button and then the Setup button App Mode You will see the Camera Setup tree control to the right of the Video interface Parameters ESP Walues Camera Setup Camera Settings ain 20 Shutter Speed 2500 B Illumination Type Bright Field Brightness High Focus Distance od Distance Units Milimeters The indicates that the setting Lens Model 45 degree is the default Sub sampling B Window of Interest Top Left Height 450 width foe l Image Processing Settings To open nested options To change a setting single click
193. er User s Manual Appendices Read Ranges Modular Zoom Optics inches mm Narrow Bar Width Read Range Field of View Depth of Field 1D 2D using autofocus Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside Edge Outside Edge 0 0033 0 08 0 005 0 13 1 to 6 25 to 152 0 53 13 1 8 46 0 2 5 0 8 20 15 0 0075 0 19 0 010 0 25 1 to 14 25 to 356 0 53 13 3 5 89 0 8 20 2 5 64 0 015 0 38 0 020 0 51 2 to 29 51 to 737 0 53 13 7 5 191 1 5 38 9 229 0 035 0 89 0 050 1 27 3 to 60 76 to 1 524 1 03 26 15 5 394 7 178 50 1 270 0 0033 0 08 0 005 0 13 1 to 3 25 to 76 0 83 21 1 8 46 0 4 10 0 8 20 ans 0 0075 0 19 0 010 0 25 1 to 6 5 25 to 165 0 83 21 3 5 89 0 8 20 1 8 46 0 015 0 38 0 020 0 51 1 to 16 25 to 406 0 83 21 8 3 211 2 51 8 5 216 0 035 0 89 0 050 1 27 2 to 32 51 to 813 1 3 33 16 4 417 3 76 21 5 546 0 0075 0 19 0 010 0 25 1 to 5 25 to 127 1 3 33 4 1 104 1 5 38 2 51 45 0 015 0 38 0 020 0 51 1 to 9 5 25 to 241 1 3 33 7 5 191 2 51 6 152 0 035 0 89 0 050 1 27 1 to 23 5 25 to 597 1 3 33 18 3 465 3 8 97 19 483 Note Ranges correspond to specific symbol element sizes and range increases as element size increases QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 5 General Specifications FIS Options QX Hawk FIS 6800 0
194. er User s Manual 5 59 Read Cycle Image Processing Settings Number of Symbols in Field of View Any Number of Symbols No limit on number of symbols attempted to decode in an image frame One Symbol Only one symbol will be decoded in an image frame and this will be regardless of any qualifying attributes associated with the read cycle Image Processing Settings Number of Symbols in Foy Any Number of Symbols Image Processing Timeout Any Humber of Symbols One Symbol Image Processing Timeout Specifies the maximum amount of time allowed for image processing to spend on a captured image When the time out expires the image processing is aborted This time out works in both rapid capture and continuous capture modes as well as with the configuration database Image Processing Settings Number of Symbols in FO Any Humber of Symbols Image Processing Timeout S000 1 65535 x1 ms Notes The time out period does not include capture time If a time out occurs the image will be recorded as a No Read This may cause some confusion because the image may decode fine given enough time 5 60 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Symbologies ait 400 Mode r r Parameters Parameters Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the Symbologies tab to display the Symbologies tree control
195. erial Trigger Stop Character lt K230 stop character gt Capture Mode A 12 lt K241 mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Capture Time Appendices lt K242 time before first capture time between 1 2 time between 2 3 time between 3 4 time between 4 5 time between 5 6 time between 6 7 time between 7 8 gt Store No Read Image lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Image Processing Timeout lt K245 image processing timeout gt Number of Symbols in Field of View lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active indexes sort database gt Configuration Database lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins symbol type gt Load Current Setting from Configuration Database lt K255 index gt Request Database Index Setting lt K255 index gt Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Symbologies l Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Micro QR Code lt K459 status gt lt K470 status check character status check character output sta
196. es for Rapid Capture Timed Capture If rapid capture is configured for timed captures this delay is measured from the point at which the previous delay expired If the delay expires during a previous capture the start of the capture will occur as soon as the previous capture or captures complete For example if rapid capture is configured for 8 captures and all delays are configured for zero all 8 captures will occur back to back as fast as the imager is able Notes for Rapid Capture Triggered Capture If rapid capture is configured for triggered captures mode the delay taken is measured from the point at which the trigger for that capture is received Also if an incoming trigger occurs before a previous delay has expired the previous capture is initiated and the delay for the incoming trigger is started Important If the unit is triggered to capture more than 8 images the unit will repeat the last delay 8th for the remaining frames 5 58 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Store No Read Image Image storage allows the user to store images from separate read cycles and has the ability to retrieve them later The number of available slots for storage depends on the mode of operation If functioning in the rapid capture mode the number of images available to store is the maximum number of the rapid count the current setting for rapid count If the user is operating in a continuous capture mode then they can store up t
197. ess configuration trees test and click Stop and other setup features to end the test When Decodes per Second Test Stop is checked the read rate test c Decodes per Second C Contrast D mm displays how many decodes the imager achieves each second instead of displaying a percentage Attribute Contrast brightens the image Symbol data is displayed here For Help press F1 QX Hawk 1 OX Hawk Domene Point to Point COM 1 2 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual App Mode Using ESP From EZ Mode click on the App Mode button to access the tabbed tree controls in Parameters the intuitive user interfaces in Setup the Terminal interface and the Utilities interface Note The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes Click this icon to return to EZ Mode ESE ESP Untitled Fie Model Options Connect View Help Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Dynamic Setup Menu toolbar Click here to open the Terminal view Beg a i S BR Jlo BD Qa rarae EZ Mode Autoconnect SendiRecy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Counters e s Device Control Communication Read Cycle Symbologies 10 Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics
198. essing Mode Static Parameters Enabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 DHCP Enabled Enabled Command OOS Enabled Enabled Enabled Command In Static Mode the imager uses the user defined IP address entered in ESP DHCP In DHCP Mode the imager automatically acquires the IP address Subnet and Gateway addresses from a DHCP or BOOTP server QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 17 Communication TCP Port 1 One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the imager The default setting is 2001 Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode g T ee Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Symbol Data Output Enabled 192 166 0 100 eo aor LO 0 0 0 0 CHEF 2001 1024 65535 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command z003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager Command Command enables command processing in the imager Data Data enables Ethernet
199. et Pattern On Target Pattern Qx Hawk EGRRESTERIN Point to Point QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 7 Locate Symbol Locate by ESP e In ESP s EZ Mode click the Locate button to enable the red X pattern Tres l C Decodes per Second L Contrast mm The symbol in the field of view will appear in the video view beneath the Locate and Calibrate buttons and you will see the red target pattern projected from the front of the imager e Center the target pattern on the symbol Center on object in field of view l Important The entire symbol should fall within the field of view FOV of the imager The field of view is what appears in ESP s Locate Calibrate window in EZ Mode e Click the Stop button to end the Locate function Stop QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 9 Locate Symbol Locate by EZ Button If you are not connected to a host computer the EZ Button allows you to locate a symbol in the imager s field of view EZ Button e Hold down the EZ Button for about one second and release when you hear one short beep The amber 20 LED will illuminate and you will see the red target pattern projected from the front of the imager e Center the target pattern on the symbol Note To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release 1 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager U
200. f Interest ROI then a change to these values does not incur the additional image frame since it is no longer a camera setting Since some image capture events require that an image frame delay occur and some don t this does complicate the image capture time when the Configuration Database is enabled Notes e If no camera change occurs the start of the image capture is immediate upon being triggered e If a camera change occurs the start of the image capture occurs after the shutter time has completed In the case above the image capture would incur a 1ms delay Number of Active Indexes Number of database records groups of settings that will be used automatically during the read cycle If set to 0 the imager only uses the current settings not database entry settings Sort Database Activates a sort function that move the database entry associated with the last decode to the first position in the database and move all other entries up 4 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Database Mode Switch Mode Selects the event that causes the imager to load the next entry from the database to current active settings When timer count expires and Image Process Looping is enabled the next database entry that has a camera modification will be used Notes Capture event always occurs when the 1st database entry is used This setting has no effect in Rapid Capture mode Rapid Capture mode always operates in
201. f Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 1 Parameters Mutpur On Outpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Qutpuk On Decodes per Trigger QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open SOL Pulse No Read 0 255 5 129 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle crosses the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 1 Parameters Gutput On Mismatch or No Read Qutput State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Qutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Out
202. f the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 1 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 127 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the imager will activate an ou
203. fectively loading position 1 the response to lt NEWM gt would be lt NEWM 1 gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared lt NEWM 0 gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 169 Matchcode Match Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is enabled Sig Match Replace Disabled Replacement String cence Enabled Replacement String User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a match occurs Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a mismatch occurs and Matchcode is enabled Se Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String oee Enabled Replacement String User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a mismatch occurs Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String MI SMATCH 5 170 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostics Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs App Mode Then click the Diagnostics ta
204. gger command is enabled Output 2 Parameters Output Gr Mismatch or No Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger 0 65535 5 140 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 E Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Frink Growth Disabled Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled Output on Unused ECC Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade Z Print Growth Threshold Grade Z Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Grade Z Unused ECC Threshold Grade Z Output on Symbol Contrast The symbol contrast is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled ka Disabled Enabled Output on Print Growth The print growth is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Print Growth Disabled w izabled Enabled Output on Axial Non Uniformity The axial non uniformity is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Axial Mon unirormity Disabled al Djsabled Enabled Output On Unused ECC The unused ECC is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value D iza
205. gger to the first capture of any triggered read cycle Capture Time Time Before 1st Capture 0 0000 Seconds Time Between Captures 1 2 Time Between Captures 2 3 Time Between Captures 3 4 Time Between Captures 4 5 Time Between Captures 5 6 Time Between Captures 6 Time Between Captures 7 0 oO Oo Oo Oo A amp Time Between Captures 1 2 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 2 3 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 3 4 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 4 5 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 5 6 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Time Between Captures 6 7 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 57 Read Cycle Time Between Captures 7 8 This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence Not
206. gorithms e Embedded Ethernet TCP IP e A green flash visible from all angles to signal a successful read e LED array for performance communication and I O user feedback e EZ Button for setup and testing e Compact size for easy integration into a wide variety of applications e IP65 67 enclosure Imager Communication There are three ways to configure and test the QX Hawk e Microscan s Windows based ESP Software Easy Setup Program which offers point and click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments e Serial commands such as lt K100 1 gt that can be sent from ESP s Terminal or another terminal program e The EZ Button on the top of the imager Ultra Lock is a trademark of Woodhead Molex QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual V Warning and Caution Summary Warning and Caution Summary This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television recep
207. gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Decodes per Trigger Status Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 48 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Status Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 3 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Match 2 Mismatch 3 Good Read When to Output Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 0 As Soon As Possible Options 0 ASAP 1 End of Read Cycle Symbology ID Output Status Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled AIM Defined ID 2 Readable ID Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Duration Output Separator Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character No Read Message No Read Message Status Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled No Read Message Serial Cmd lt K714 no read message status No Read message gt Default NOREA
208. gt Mismatch Counter lt Y gt Mismatch Counter Reset lt A gt Software Reset Retain Current Parameters lt Ard gt Software Reset Recall Factory Defaults lt Arp gt Software Reset Recall Power On Defaults lt Arc gt Software Reset Recall Customer Defaults Default Reset Save lt Z gt Software Reset Save Current Settings for Power On lt Zc gt ee Reset Save Current Settings as Customer lt Zrd gt Software Reset Recall Factory Defaults and Save for Power On lt Zrc gt Software Reset Recall Customer Defaults and Save for Power On lt L1 gt Programmable Output 1 lt L2 gt Programmable Output 2 Device Control lt L3 gt Programmable Output 3 lt gt Disable Imager lt H gt Enable Imager lt gt Display All Part Numbers lt a gt Display Application Code Part Number lt b gt Display Boot Code Part Number lt d gt Display DSP Code Part Number Firmware Checksum Display Kernel Code Part Number lt s gt Display SafeMode Part Number lt gt Display All Firmware Build Numbers lt a gt Display Application Code Build Number lt b gt Display Boot Code Build Number lt d gt Display DSP Code Build Number Display Kernel Code Build Number lt l gt Display All Available Firmware Checksums A 64 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices
209. h against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled DES n Em Enabled Symbol Length Specifies the exact number of bars that must be present for the imager to recognize and decode the Pharmacode symbol Symbol Length 1 16 Minimum Bars Sets the minimum number of bars that a Pharmacode symbol must have to be considered valid Minimum Bars 5 lt 1 16 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 83 Symbologies Bar Width Status If set to Mixed the imager will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars If set to All Narrow all bars will be considered as narrow bars If set to All Wide all bars will be considered as wide bars If set to Fixed Threshold it will use the fixed threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when the imager is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars Bar Width Status Fised Threshold Direction Specifies the direction in which a symbol can be read Direction Formard Forward Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold Defines the minimum difference in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar Fixed Threshold Value 1 65535 Background Color Specifies whether the symbol will be presented on a black background or a wh
210. his allows a user essentially to create a back up set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power on parameters have been accidentally changed or are no longer desired It is important to note that a hardware default does not affect customer default parameters For example a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a lt Z gt command may not know the correct settings or have the capability to communicate within those settings By first doing an EZ Button default to restore the known Microscan defaults the user can then recall the previous customer saved settings with an lt Arc gt or lt Zrc gt command Microscan Default Parameters Microscan default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed Software Defaults Microscan default parameters can be recalled loaded into current settings with the lt Ard gt command or recalled and saved for power on with the lt Zrd gt command Hardware Default If a software default and reset is not possible it may be necessary to reset the imager by shorting connecting specific pins This procedure has the same effect as the lt Zrd gt software command Important For this reset to occur this command must be executed within 60 seconds of a power on or a reset 1 Apply power to the imager 2 If using an IB 131 locate pins 7 and 11 on the host connector Caution Be certain that the correct
211. i O Milz ES Example Default Settings Sizing Information Sets the bar height in inches and bar width in mils or thousandths of an inch of user created symbols Example A bar width of 18 mils is 0 018 inches 2 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Advanced Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Auto Syne When entering a view that supports Auto Syne do the following Always Ask Before Auto Syne Occurs Receive Settings from the Reader C Send ESP Settings to the Reader C Do Not Send or Receive Settings V Show Target Pattern During Locate Send XON with Autoconnect Show Target Pattern During Calibrate V Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting Use Higher Quality Images Connect to readers via TCP IP V Open Image after Save V Use Default Storage Location Default Settings The Auto Sync options at the top of the Advanced tab allow the user to determine whether Auto Sync will be enabled automatically in sections of ESP where it is used or if it will ask before it enables Auto Sync functions Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs If this option box is checked specific Auto Sync functions can be enabled Receive Settings from the Reader will automatically send the imager s settings to ESP when Auto Sync is enabled Send ESP Settings to the Reader will automatically send all imager configuration settings chosen in ESP to the imager Do Not Send or Re
212. ical T Height 1 59 40 5 mm a 3 10in gl Width 2 27 57 6 mm 78 7mm Depth 3 79 96 3 mm Weight 10 oz 280 g Environmental Enclosure Die cast aluminum IP65 67 rated Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Storage Temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Humidity up to 90 non condensing Communication Interface Standard Interfaces RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 3 70ir Ethernet ry 96 3mm CE Mark General Immunity for Light Industry EN 55024 1998 ITE Immunity Standard Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE Equipment EN 55022 98 ITE Disturbances Light Source Type High output LEDs 1 57in 40 5rar WARNING LED LIGHT i28 8mm DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CENTER OF OPTICS Light Output 564 mW Wavelength 470 525 617 nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 2 47 in 62 6mm _ Light Collection Options Progressive scan square pixel Shutter Software adjustable 1 60 to 1 40 000 WVGA 752 x 480 pixels Symbologies 2D Symbologies Data Matrix ECC 0 200 QR Code Micro QR Code Stacked Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 GS1 DataBar Composite and Stacked Linear Symbologies Code 39 Code 128 m BC412 Interleaved 2 of 5 UCP EAN Codabar 49in Code 93 Sees 12 4mm Read Parameters Pitch 30 QX Hawk Dimensions Skew 30 Tilt 360 Decode Rate Up to 60 decodes per second Foca
213. icking and dragging the ESP window from the lower right corner This is useful where very small symbols are being read Click and drag your cursor over the symbol that you want to isolate for reading Notice that the surrounding area goes black You can use the handles on the image area that you have just drawn to resize the region of interest You can also click on the center of the window of interest and move it Test the new settings in Read Rate Mode Window of Interest Top Height Contrast Window of Interest a Let 0 Width Note To remove the window of interest click the Reset button or click anywhere in the WOI pane Note that all pixels not in the WOI are defined as black Because the imager has far less processing to do in a smaller window read rates typically increase dramatically One possible downside is that the chance of missing a symbol increases with the smaller window Always verify that your WOI will be large enough to allow for any random movement of symbols in your field of view QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Configuration Database The Configuration Database allows the user to manage multiple configuration profiles It is a useful tool in applications that require several different imager configurations to be applied sequentially and it allows the user to perform far more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configurati
214. ill be driven if the Symbol Contrast grade is under the threshold Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade L w Print Growth Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Print Growth grade is under the threshold Print Growth Threshold Grade C w Axial Non Uniformity Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Axial Non Uniformity grade is under the threshold Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Unused ECC Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output will be driven if the Unused ECC grade is under the threshold larade C ka Unused ECC Threshold 5 132 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the im
215. increments that the discrete output remains active Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output Stabe Hormally Open Pulse width 0 500 L Seconds Output Mode Pulse Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 2 Parameters Qutpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Qutput State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Gutput Mode Pulse Pulse Latch Mode 7 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid will output 5 136 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met an
216. interface lo AN devices At each location on a network where a new power supply is added the Power switch on the QX 1 can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors N A 1 3 and T O a The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T can be broken using the Trigger switch This isolates trigger signals as required by the application J QX 1 LZ mie IE CJ gt O gt 7 YZ W x SY TT oie gt Po ee Ea Supply lt Ug HL To Power K g QX 1 Multidrop E a Supply Concentrator Host or PLC QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Port Routing The physical advantages created by flexible signal routing and switching are enhanced further by Port Routing which can be configured in ESP Port Routing eliminates the Hardware Installation need for dedicated Host and Aux ports in a traditional sense With Port Routing any port can be defined as a Host or Aux port Port Routing also allows users to define the data types that are accessible from specific ports The primary benefit of Port Routing is that any type of data can be routed to any port and can be sent through multiple ports simultaneously Multiple types of data can also be appended to the symbol data that is output from the imager to the host Command data symbol data extra symbol information and diagnostic data are enabled by default in the QX Hawk The table below l
217. iode LED A semiconductor device that emits light when conducting current Lens A transparent piece of material with curved surfaces which either converge or diverge light rays Machine Vision The automatic acquisition and analysis of images to obtain desired data for controlling a specific activity Multidrop A communications protocol for networking two or more imagers or other devices with a concentrator or controller and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS 485 standard Noise The same as static in a phone line or snow in a television picture noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the image being read and transferred by the imager Normally Closed A discrete output state that is only active when open Normally Open A discrete output state that is only active when closed Object Plane An imaginary plane in the field of view focused by an imager s optical system at the corresponding image plane on the sensor QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 83 Glossary of Terms Output A channel or communications line Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device Parity An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Picket Fence Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicula
218. ional cordsets and accessories are available in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Note The QX Hawk does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 Important Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional imagers in the daisy chain U T Ot E Se amp 00000 E oo oojJf Sn ji 4 fi Common 12 pin Plug to 12 pin Socket Host Serial 12 pin Socket to DB9 Power Supply 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor Serial Standalone with QX 1 es 11110011 TAT Common 12 pin Plug Host to 12 pin Ethernet 8 pin Socket Plug to RJ45 l Lal OD Ps w Power Supply 12 pin Socket Photo Sensor Ethernet Standalone with QX 1 Hardware Required Caution Be sure that all connections are secure BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables 1 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 2 Connect the System Important When connecting Ultra Lock cordsets to the QX Hawk and QX 1 align the pins first and then push the connector into place Do not twist the connectors as this will bend th
219. iple indexes must be entered in order to insert longer character sequences For example to insert a 10 character sequence in user defined output three commands with consecutive index numbers would be required where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2 Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default 0 Disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to 4 Hex String Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database entry Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to be inserted in the user defined output string These two characters comprise the hex base 16 value of the ASCII character For example to enter the three character sequence Hi 3 would indicate the length of the string and a hex sequence of 486921 would be the ASCII sequence to be inserted 48 H 69 i 21 Important Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF Since there is a limit of 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry there is a limit of 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default NULL 0x00 Options 00 to FF As many as 4 bytes or hex pairs A 60 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Format Assign Symbol Number Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Options 1 to 10
220. ique vendor ID and are then responsible for insuring that all of their devices have unique addresses in the last 3 bytes QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 79 Glossary of Terms Appendix J Glossary of Terms Aberration The failure of an optical lens to produce an exact point to point correspondence between the object and its resulting image Various types are chromatic spherical coma astigmatism and distortion Absorption The loss of light of certain wavelengths as it passes through a material and is converted to heat or other forms of energy Active Illumination Lighting an area with a light source coordinated with the acquisition of an image Strobed flash tubes and pulsed lasers are examples ADC See Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter See Analog to Digital Converter AGC See Automatic Gain Control Ambient Light Light which is present in the environment of the imaging front end of a vision system and generated from outside sources This light unless used for actual illumination will be treated as background Noise by the vision system Analog A smooth continuous voltage or current signal or function whose magnitude value is the information Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter or ADC A device that converts an analog voltage or current signal to a discrete series of digitally encoded numbers signal for computer processing Application Specific Integrat
221. ists different types of data with examples for each data type Data Type Example Command Data Serial commands imager responses to serial commands Symbol Data Any string of data encoded in a symbol Extra Symbol Information Decodes per trigger decode direction configuration database index number Diagnostic Data Service message The screen capture below from ESP shows the QX Hawk s four communications ports and the parameters for each Parameters Communications R5232 A Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode B R5232 B Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode R5422 Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode EtherNetsIP Search and Configure Mode Protocol Selection External Data Routing Array Communication Modes H Preamble H Postamble ESP Values 115 2K None One Eight Enabled E
222. ite background Background Color White a 5 84 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters GS1 DataBar Note GS1 DataBar symbologies were previously known as Reduced Space Symbology or RSS DataBar Expanded Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 14 DataBar Limited Disabled DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled DataBar Expanded Note DataBar Expanded was previously known as RSS Expanded Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point of sale and other applications DataBar Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14 digit EAN item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance over 2 stacked and non stacked DataBar Expanded Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 14 Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check character If disabled any length would be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled izabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of character
223. ity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits 5 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Data Bits Eight Eight Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager Symbol Data Output JE nabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager Enabled Disabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager Diagnostics Oukput Enabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 11 Communication External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the imager Data Data enables RS 422 as a data source port
224. l Range 1 33 mm to liquid lens autofocus Note Ranges correspond to specific symbol element sizes and range increases as element size increases Indicators LEDs Read Performance Power Read Status Green Flash Good Read Red X Symbol Locator Beeper Good Read Match Mismatch No Read Serial Command Confirmation On Off A 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Electrical Power Requirement 5 28VDC Discrete I O Input 1 Trigger New Master Optoisolated 4 5 28V rated 13 mA at 24VDC New Master is to signal ground Outputs 1 2 3 Optoisolated 1 28V rated Ice lt 100 mA at 24VDC current limited by user Safety Certifications CDRH FCC CE CB BDMI a FE CE Y RoHS WEEE Compliant ISO Certification ISO 9001 Certified Issued by TuV USA 2010 Microscan Systems Inc All rights reserved Specifications subject to change Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25 C 77 F using grade A labels Performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes Warranty One year limited warranty on parts and labor Extended warranty available QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 3 General Specifications QX 1 Interface Device Mechanical Height 75 19 1 mm Width 2 50 83 5 mm Depth 3 15 80 mm Weight 7 oz 200 g QX 1 Dimensions A 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imag
225. le character strings can be used to frame the decoded data and both are included in calculating the LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocal Port RS232 A ACK f MAK Options RES MUL REC NUL STA MUL ETK MUL ACK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENQ STA STX ETX ETH ACK ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout a LEZ Status Disabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 21 Communication Protocol Options SE Protocol Selection Point to Point Address Point to Point Protocol Port Point to Point with ATSYCTS Point to Point with SOM s OFF Point to Point with ATS CTS and SON OFF ACE NAE Polling Point to Point Standard Used only with RS 232 or RS 422 Standard Point to Point requires no address and sends the data to the host whenever it is available without a request or handshake from the host Point to Point with RTS CTS A scanner initiates a data transfer with an RTS request to send transmission The host when ready responds with a CTS clear to send and the data is transmitted RTS and CTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS 232 standard Used only with RS 232 Point to Point with RTS CTS request to send clear to send is a simple hardware handshake protocol that allows a scanner to initiate data transfers to the host Point to Point with XON XOFF lf an XOFF has been received from the h
226. led Enabled Important Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow or Narrow Enhanced Quiet Zone enabled because a large intercharacter gap over 3x could cause a narrow quiet zone 5x to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap 5 66 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start and stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbology that does not match the specified length Symbol Length 1 64 Full ASCII Set Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set 0 9 A Z etc The user must know in advance whether or not to use the Full ASCII Set option Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character it is less efficient Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar sign and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled the imager
227. led Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position Increment Match Length Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Hew Master Pin Disabled 5 164 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Match Start Position Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparison For example if a symbol contains a part number manufacturing date and lot code info but only the part number information is needed set the imager to sort only the part number and to ignore the other characters Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol from left to right that will be compared with those of the master symbol when Matchcode Type is set to Enabled or Sequential For example if Match Start Position is set to 3 the first 2 characters read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared up to the number of characters specified by Match Length Note Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature A 0 setting will disable this feature Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 3000 Match Length 1 Wild Card i Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Match Length Exam
228. length BC412 symbol as valid Enabled The imager will reject any BC412 symbol that does not match the fixed code length value for BC412 BC412 Disabled Check Character Qukput Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled wt Fixed Symbol Length Disabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length The code length used to validate BC 412 symbols if the fixed code length status is set to enabled BC412 Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled al Fixed Symbol Length w g 1 64 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 71 Symbologies Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length however Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as symbol truncation A dense contimuous self checking numeric symbology Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements two wide and three narrow representing numbers O through 9 with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character A check character is highly recommended Interleaved 2 of 5 Disabled Check Character Status Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Symbol Length 1 10 Symbol Length 2 6 Guard Bar Disabled Range Mode Status Disabled Check Character St
229. length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 36 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Fixed Symbol Length Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 Full ASCII Set Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Match Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start
230. ll output 5 146 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 3 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 147 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 3 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down
231. load lt uy path and image file name gt Note There are only three scales available from the imager The three scales are full quarter and eighth The Directory response will read out the image dimensions To receive the image request to download by the reported dimensions If quarter scaled or eighth scaled images are required then divide the dimensions by 4 or by 8 and request by the reduced dimensions 1 Directory None assumes root Root Directory saved Saved Directory 2 Image Status Good IP decoded a symbol No Read IP did not decode a symbol Mismatch IP decoded the wrong symbol Pending Not run through IP 3 Age Oton n Max Images 8 lt Max 4 Image Name Full Scale 1280 x 1024 bmp 1280 x 1024 gs bmp 1280 x 1024 jpg 1280 x 1024 q 1 100 jpg Valid Scales Depends on Full Dimensions 1280 x 1024 Full 320 x 256 Quarter divide by 4 160 x 128 Eighth divide by 8 5 Type bmp Bitmap image no loss of resolution jpg JPEG image loss of resolution with compression JPEG Compression Quality 1 100 _q1 jpg _q100 jpg Examples lt uy saved noread 2 320x256_gs bmp gt lt uy saved noread 2 320x256_q33 jpg gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 33 Y Modem Transfer Options Y Modem Download Code lt dy key gt Key app bin dsp bin ker bin Note The key field only accepts app bin dsp bin or ker bin 1 34 QX Hawk Industrial
232. ly lt K407 gt returns hours minutes Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt User Defined Name lt K412 user defined name gt Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Output Filter Enable QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual lt K745 number of filters gt Serial Commands Serial Command Format Microscan readers are controlled by two types of serial commands configuration commands and utility commands Rules that apply to both configuration and utility commands e Less than lt and greater than gt angle bracket characters enclose the commands e Commands and data are case sensitive Characters must be entered as upper or lower case as specified Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands are sent during operations and are not followed by lt A gt or lt Z gt Serial Configuration Commands K Commands Microscan s serial configuration commands begin with a single K character followed by a 3 digit numeric character comma separated command fields and an initializing command
233. ly Memory ROM A data storage medium used in computers and other electronics primarily used to distribute Firmware Real Time Processing In machine vision the ability of a system to perform a complete analysis and take action on one part before the next one arrives for inspection A 84 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Region Area of an image Also called a region of interest for image processing operations ROM See Read Only Memory Saturation The degree to which a color is free of white One of the three properties of color perception along with hue and value Scattering Redirection of light reflecting off a surface or through an object Skew Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol height on the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Substrate The surface upon which a linear or 2D symbol is printed stamped or etched Symbol Transitions The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object Symbology A symbol type such as Code 39 or Code 128 with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information Tilt Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis perpendicular to the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Trigger A signal transition or character string that
234. mage will be surrounded by an area of interest box a dashed blue line with red anchor points that can be selected and moved by placing a cursor inside the box and can be resized by clicking and dragging the anchor points good_254 0 60 ms Evaluate Line Scan Histogram Results Max Light 192 Min Dark 16 Median 68 Mean 67 High Peak 0 Low Peak 34 Variance 646 Number of Pixels 4 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Line Scan 1 From the Evaluation tab click the Line Scan button A window like that shown below will appear 2 Drag your cursor horizontally across the image This will create a dashed horizontal line Pixel information and a visual representation of the dark and light pixels will be displayed below the image good_287_0 60 ms Evaluate Line Scan White 255 Pixel Info Average N A Origin 0 0 Position NAA Value N A Black 0 y hial ai Task Maaah ilin When you center your cursor over the dashed line it becomes a double arrow cross This allows you to move the line anywhere in the window You can also use your keyboard arrows to move the line incrementally in any direction As with the histogram the line scan compares light and dark pixels but in a spatial distribution On the Y axis of the graph below 0 is black and 255 is white the X axis represents the horizontal axis of the symbol as described by the line scan When you click
235. mand to function Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Enabled the master symbol sequences on every decode match or mismatch Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Disabled the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur The imager will sequence the master to one more or one less than the decoded symbol Matchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Stark Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card j Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Sequence Step New Master Pin Disabled isabled Enabled Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Enabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequence on mismatch 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequence on mismatch 006 ghi 007 sequence on mismatch 007 007 008 Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced because of previous match 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced because of previous match 006 ghi 006 not sequenced 006 006 007 5 168 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User
236. match Counter Reset lt A gt Software Reset Retain Current Parameters lt Ard gt Software Reset Recall Factory Defaults lt Arp gt Software Reset Recall Power On Defaults lt Arc gt Software Reset Recall Customer Defaults Default Reset Save lt Z gt Software Reset Save Current Settings for Power On lt Zc gt Software Reset Save Current Settings as Customer Defaults lt Zrd gt Software Reset Recall Factory Defaults and Save for Power On lt Zrc gt Software Reset Recall Customer Defaults and Save for Power On lt L1 gt Programmable Output 1 lt L2 gt Programmable Output 2 Device Control lt L3 gt Programmable Output 3 lt gt Disable Imager lt H gt Enable Imager Display All Part Numbers Display Application Code Part Number Display Boot Code Part Number Display DSP Code Part Number Firmware Checksum Display Kernel Code Part Number lt s gt Display SafeMode Part Number lt gt Display All Firmware Build Numbers lt a gt Display Application Code Build Number 7 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities lt b gt Display Boot Code Build Number lt d gt Display DSP Code Build Number lt k gt Display Kernel Code Build Number Firmware Checksum lt l gt Display All Available Firmware Checksums lt la gt Display Application Code Code Checksum lt d g
237. mation output from the imager Extra Symbol Information Enabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager Diagnostics Output Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the imager Data Data enables RS 232 B as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 9 Communication RS 422 The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 422 formatting R5422 Disabled Baud Rate 115 2 Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Disabled Extra Symbol Information Disabled Diagnostics Qutpuk Disabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate 115 2K Par
238. maximum cable lengths and number of drivers In the QX Hawk selection of interface is made by pin assignment and in the case of host communication by software switching between RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 RS 232 RS 232 defines an interface between two devices such as for example the imager and host It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet 19 7m Despite being the most limited this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS 232 equipment RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 unlike RS 232 measures signals deferentially that is the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive or transmit wires rather than the potential between signal and ground As a result cables if shielded can be up to 4000 feet 1219m in length Like RS 232 RS 422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground It can be used wherever RS 232 is used Ethernet TCP IP TCP IP and EtherNet IP protocols are supported over Ethernet A 6 byte hardware address is used which is divided into a 3 byte vendor ID and a 3 byte vendor defined field Ethernet enabled device manufacturers are assigned a un
239. mplete Caution Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 17 Firmware Firmware Verification Request Part Number Send a request to the imager for application code boot code DSP code or kernel code part numbers 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 Select App Code Boot Code DSP Code or Kernel Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Part No button 3 Click the Request Part No button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right Firmware Yertication peta i fearon ES E Select the firmware App Code Boot Code Request Checksum 00000 DSP Code Kernel Code Request Part Number by Serial Command Note X base part number R revision number When lt gt a request for all part numbers is sent the imager returns lt al35 XXXXXX RR gt lt b 35 XXXXXX RR gt lt d 35 XXXXXX RR gt lt k 35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt a gt a request for the application code part number is sent the imager returns lt al35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt b gt a request for the boot code part number is sent the imager returns lt b 35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt d gt a request for the DSP code part number is sent the imager returns lt d 35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt k gt a request for the kernel code part number is sent the imager returns lt k 35 XXXXXX RR gt When lt s gt
240. n will be discarded and will be unavailable in the next session 2 11 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Menu Toolbar Connect The Connect dropdown menu allows the user to access the Connection Wizard as well as the Autoconnect and Configure Multidrop dialogs Connect and Disconnect can also be performed directly from the dropdown menu without opening a dialog Connect Connection Wizard Auroconnecek Connect Disconnect Configure Multidrop Connection Wizard To connect using the Connection Wizard e Click Connect on ESP s menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard e Select RS 232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display e Configure RS 232 or Ethernet settings as required by the application and click Connect Baud 115 2K Z IP Address 162 148 88 5 Parity Non Stop Bits One m Data Bits Eight bd Port COM1 Aux Port In Use e RS 232 C RS 232 Ethernet Ethernet TCP Port 1 2001 a Click the Search button to locate sech fol imagers on the network Force Connect Auto Connect Cancel RS 232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible 2 12 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Autoconnect e If the RS 232 connection attempt fails use Autoconnect to establish a connection between
241. nabled Enabled Command Enabled 115 2K None One Eight Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Disabled 115 2K None One Eight Disabled Disabled Disabled Command Enabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 Static 2001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 2003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Enabled Enabled Point to Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual RS 232 A RS 232 B and RS 422 are serial RS 232 A is always enabled RS 232 B and RS 422 can be enabled or disabled to match the physical requirements of the application Ethernet can also be enabled or disabled as required RS 232 A RS 232 B and RS 422 can be configured for Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Decodes Before Output Symbol Position Output etc Diagnostics Output and External Source Processing Mode Command or Data Ethernet can be configured for IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Mode Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Informa tion Diagnostics Output and External Source Processing Mode Application Examples Application Examples The following examples demonstrate how the components described in previous pages can be deployed in industrial applications Daisy Chain Daisy chain configurations are used in applications such as product packaging where single items have multiple symbols For example a box with
242. nce of the two means is the Symbol Contrast ANSI Symbol Contrast grading is defined this way A 4 0 if SC 70 0 if SC 2 55 if SC gt 40 if SC 20 B 3 C 2 0 D 1 0 F 0 0 if SC lt 20 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 29 Static Validation Print Growth Definition The extent to which dark or light markings appropriately fill or exceed their module boundaries These values are determined by counting pixels in the clock pattern of the binary digitized image then comparing it to a nominal value and minimum and maximum values The grade is defined in this way A 4 0 if 050 lt PG lt 0 50 B 3 0 if 070 lt PG lt 0 70 C 2 0 if 085 lt PG lt 0 85 D 1 0 if 100 lt PG lt 1 00 F 0 0 if PG lt 1 00 or PG gt 1 00 Axial Non Uniformity Data Matrix Only Definition Axial non uniformity is a measure of how much the sampling point Spacing differs from one axis to another namely AN abs XAVG YAVG XAVG YAVG 2 where abs yields the absolute value If a symbology has more than two major axes then AN is computed for those two average spacings which differ the most The grade is defined in this way ae 0 if AN lt 06 B 2 0 if AN lt 08 C 2 0 if AN lt 10 D 1 0 if AN lt 12 F 0 0 if AN 2 12 Unused Error Correction Data Matrix Only Definition 7 30 The correction capacity of Reed Solomon decoding is expressed in the
243. ncoded within a symbol typically where the symbol is transported from one facility to another For example an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way without reference to a database A two dimensional multi row 3 to 90 continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity up to 2 700 numeric characters 1 800 printable ASCII characters or 1 100 binary characters per symbol Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces ina 17 module structure POF41 Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Codeword Collection Single Image Note Sending lt a1 gt from ESP s Terminal will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Characters This feature can be disabled by re sending lt a1 gt Fixed Symbol Length Status When Enabled the imager will reject any PDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Disabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted When enabled the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the sym
244. nditions Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the imager is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Diagnostics Service Unik Disabled Disabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 143 I O Parameters Output 3 Parameters Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2 Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory B Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read a Output State Mismatch or No Read
245. nector Traditional Threaded Connectors Another advantage of the QX Hawk s Ultra Lock connectivity scheme is that the Ultra Lock receptacles on the imagers and the QxX 1 Interface Device also accept screw down connectors giving users the flexibility to use either Ultra Lock or screw down connectors Ultra Lock is a trademark of Woodhead Molex 3 2 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation Cordsets The terms cordset and cable are both applicable to industrial connectivity but they are not synonymous Cordsets enable communications and power between imagers and interface devices Cordsets have an M12 Ultra Lock connector at one or both ends Examples of cordsets are shown below M12 Ultra Lock to Photo Sensor Cordset Cables do not have M12 Ultra Lock connectors at either end An example of a cable is shown below Cable with flying leads QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 3 3 QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts QX Hawk and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts When deploying a network of imagers and interface devices in an industrial setting it is important to use components whose pin assignments are arranged in a way that avoids communication errors and equipment damage This can be achieved with components that are designed in a logical consistent and easy to implement way The QX Hawk has a very simple pin assignment methodology The clearly identified connectors at the b
246. ng mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 24 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Diagnostic Output Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data Preamble Preamble Status Serial Cmd lt K141 status oreamble character s gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Preamble Characters Serial Cmd lt K141 status preamble character s gt Default CR 0x0D Options 1 4 ASCII characters Postamble Postamble Status Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Postamble Characters Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Default CR LF 0x0D 0x0A Options 1 4 ASCII characters Response Timeout Serial Cmd lt K143 response timeout gt Default 5 x10 ms 50 Options 0 to 255 x10 ms QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 25 Serial Commands LRC Status Serial Cmd lt K145 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled ACK NAK Options Serial Cmd RES NAK Defaul
247. ngth gt DataBar Omnidirectional lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt A 13 Serial Commands MicroPDF417 lt K485 status unused fixed length status fixed symbol length gt Camera Setup l Camera Settings lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Sub Sampling lt K542 sub sampling gt Focus Distance lt K525 focal distance distance units lens type gt Illumination lt K539 mode brightness gt Window of Interest lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt vo Parameters l Calibration Options lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type window of interest framing window of interest margin gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbol data gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt Global Symbol Quality Output lt K708 quality output separator output mode gt ISO IEC 16022 Parameters lt K709 symbo contrast print growth axial non uniformity unused ECC gt Data Matrix Grading lt K710 perce
248. nt cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Frame Information lt K734 output frame number output coordinates gt ISO IEC 16022 Grade LED Display lt K737 unused LED AIM LED display gt Green Flash LED lt K750 LED status targeting status green flash duration gt Status Indicators lt K751 comm bar graph I O 1 1 O0 2 gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator character gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 2 Trend Analysis Output 3 Diagnostics Output 1 Diagnostics Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt lt K782 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt lt K790 unused service unit gt lt K791 unused service unit gt Diagnostics Output 3 lt K792 unused service unit gt Symbol Quality Output 1 A 14 lt K800 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Outp
249. nt pceise ac sy national asdvantathcnseudeacsoesdsSveds chanteur soeduedtadamuaiest 1 32 Y Modem Transfer Options ccccccccccceecceseseceeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeetaneess 7 33 Appendices Appendix A General Specifications cccccccccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications ccccccccceecceeeeeceeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeees A 7 Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeees A 9 Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset PINOUtS cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes A 11 Appendix E Serial COMMAMNAS ccccsecccceeeeceeeeeeaeeceseaaeeesaseesaaeees A 12 Appendix F Protocol COMMANGS cccceeeececeeececeeceeeeeeeeseeeeesneeees A 66 Appendix G ASCII Table xi csxicncseiirtsee ele aed A 75 Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cccccseeceeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeens A 76 Appendix Interface Standards cccccccccccesecceceeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeeseaees A 79 Appendix J Glossary Of Terms cccccsseccceseceeeeeeeceeeesseeseeseeeeesanees A 80 iv QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Introduction About the QX Hawk Industrial Imager The key features of the QX Hawk Industrial Imager are e Fully integrated liquid lens technology allowing infinite focus flexibility e High resolution modular optical Zoom system e Simple plug and play connectivity with Ultra Lock cordsets and connectors e Best in class X Mode al
250. o the maximum number of the rapid count 3 Image Storage Type Disabled Clear Upon selection all saved images will be cleared and the unit will not store images for later retrieving Store on No Read The unit will store an image upon exiting the read cycle that retrieved a later time If multiple captures are present during the duration of a read cycle the image stored will be the last image processed for the read cycle This image is stored in RAM and can be retrieved as long as power is applied and the unit has not been reset via reset save sequences Other commands that can initialize the storage RAM are ones that changed capture modes or put the unit in a test capture mode E Store Mo Read Image Dizabled Image Storage Mode mee Image Storage Type Store on Mo Read Image Storage Mode First Image In this mode the image storage will store images until the available image memory has been filled At this point the unit will stop saving additional images In this mode you will always have the first images that were stored Last Image In this mode the image storage will continue to store images after the available memory has been filled by purging the oldest image in the storage memory In this mode you will always have the last images that were stored Store Wo Read Image Image Storage Type Disabled Image Storage Mode First Image a First Image Last Image QX Hawk Industrial Imag
251. odes per Trigger Status When Enabled the imager enters a state where it processes frames as configured until the end of a read cycle with or without a successful symbol decode When the read cycle ends the imager outputs any decoded symbol data along with the decodes per trigger count Quality Output Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Qutput meer Enabled 5 154 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Quality Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the Symbol Quality tab to display the Symbol Quality tree control Y a Parameters Parameters ESP Values Symbol Quality B Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Qutput Mode Grade Data Matrix H ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture lu Mlela Mr aa Locate Time Disabled is the default Decode Time Enel Pixels Per Element Enabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled To open nested To change a setting double click the options single click setting and use the cursor to scroll the through the options Note Symbol Quality settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Man
252. ogy type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default Ox3F Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Data Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters A 62 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Decode Direction Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Any Direction Options 0 Any Direction 1 Forward 2 Reverse Database Index Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 any index Options 0 to 10 Output Filter Enable Serial Cmd lt K745 number of filters gt Default 0 Options 0 to 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 63 Serial Commands Serial Utility Commands Type Command Name Bar Code Configuration lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration lt CAL gt Calibrat Calibration as e lt OPTIC gt Initiate Lens Calibration lt N gt No Read Counter lt O gt No Read Counter Reset lt T gt Trigger Counter lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset Counters 99 lt V gt Good Read Match Counter lt W gt Good Read Match Counter Reset lt X
253. om the last power on or Good Read Match Counter Reset command To count the good reads that match the master symbol enable Matchcode To count good reads only disable Matchcode This counter is always active and can be requested at any time A lt V OVERF_nnn gt will be output if the counter is overflowed nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed 255 times is the maximum Sending lt V gt again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed Example lf the counter is at 999999997 and 3 additional counts have been captured then lt V ERROR gt will be output and the next lt V gt command without any new good reads or matches will return lt V 000000001 gt Good Read Match Counter Reset sending lt W gt sets the Good Read Match Counter to 000000000 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 1 Counters Mismatch Counter sending lt X gt displays the total number of symbols successfully decoded that do not match the master symbol since power on or the last Mismatch Counter Reset command A lt X OVERF_nnn gt will be output if the counter is overflowed nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed 255 times is the maximum Sending lt X gt again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed Example If the counter is at 999999999 and 1 additional count has been captured then lt X ERROR gt will be output and the next lt X gt command without any new mism
254. ommand Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 23 Serial Commands Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type Symbol Data Output Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type Symbol Data Output Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processi
255. on and click Connect Baud 115 2K z IP Address 162 148 88 51 RS 232 RS 232 C Ethemet Parity Mona zj Ethemet TCP Port 1 2001 4 Stop Bits y z Data Bits Eight Z Port COM1 Me Aux Port In Use Search RS 232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible TONMESTED I Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 9 1 Important The imager is in Continuous Read Mode by default For best connection results be sure that no decodable symbols are within the imager s field of view while attempting to connect QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 7 Connect cont Step 6 Connect cont Ethernet TCP IP Once the QX Hawk is connected incoming symbol data can be displayed in the Terminal as shown below ESF Untitled File Model gt EZ Mode F amp i 123456789612 123456789612 123456787612 123456789812 123456787812 1234567896812 123456787612 123456789812 123456789612 1234567896812 123456789612 Options 123456789612 123456789612 123456789812 123456789612 123456789812 123456789612 1234567896812 Next Row For Help press FL 1 8 Connect Autoconnect Switch Model Find Read Rate decodefsec View Terminal Help B Parameters Setup Send Read Rate percent Oy Hawk 1 End Read Rake g Terminal Utilities Targ
256. on parameters Active Indexes Auto Syne Database settings with Reader Advanced Options eae seul Processing Settings O2 os EE a oes eer O Sted ce Or oa lao b fo oan 752 Dieas Os C C Ce E Os CR C Ce E Ow C C Ce r Capture for Ever Index Show Database Indes in Output C Sort Indes Positions on Good Reads Load Curent To Indes Load Index To Current Configuration Database view set for 5 Active Indexes with Capture Settings highlighted As soon as the number of active database settings is something other than 0 the database is enabled Once enabled the current configuration settings that are handled by the database have no impact on imager operation Capture Index Each index in the database can be configured and tested individually QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 17 Configuration Database Shutter Speed Sets the camera s shutter speed for the selected index Gain Sets the camera s gain for the selected index Focal Distance Sets the camera s focal distance for the selected index Sub Sampling Sets the sub sampling rate 4 1 or 16 1 for the selected index Important Sub Sampling has no effect when the Image Dimension mode is configured as Region of Interest in the Database Mode command This is because the camera Window of Interest is determined by the software based on the database ROI setup and there is no benefit to sub sampling to increase spee
257. ontents DANOS ICS o aee titers ae erk de nate uencsea eee asec sanenwauacnaecuaboodesesulactees 5 171 Chapter 6 Terminal PETAL WV TING OW aee ra a a a 6 2 PP MNCL PAE EAE IIT E AEE E eos eat A NAE T eh oa 6 3 SONO aaa a Ne ee 6 4 MacOS cla a es aaa E ee es ales 6 5 Terminal Window Me nus ccccccssccceeecceeeeceeeeceseecaeesaeeesueeesaeessusensas 6 6 Chapter 7 Utilities Serial Utility COMM ANG Sesh selond saeies a sb aE a Eih 7 2 FRO AG RAC sce i ee a daca A cues onuece ae nade aes em eae cae 1 4 COUET Se atest ac ecient acces a tnnccn saint Pacer asa esaneeean een een nee autentaee poe 7 6 DEVICE COMMON 233 ci sereecssthasiesetses cores ae etcctis nee eetes searecda teh teas sb Steien 7 9 Differences from Defaullt ccccccceccccssececeeeceseeeeeseeeeeesaeeesseeessaaeees 7 10 Master Database sisri a edness Reco eaeeede 7 11 PrN NS 3a ca otic sari sats areal eats a eu Stee ohdvesa E a ieee 1 17 Bar Code Configuration MOde cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaaees 7 21 Calibratie 7 22 Default Reset Save ccccccccccccccccesceeceeceeceeceeeeeeeecsuacesseaeessaaeeesaeeetsagees 7 23 mager S LAWS oseere E dee cseua Sasi tea Aazeete 7 25 Learn Operations ce scorseccsi ec a A A 7 27 FREDOOL SV SIC MN sescc cece cris eck oct csceedcceptcettae aA 7 28 Statie Validato Mss force setts cen aceetieanc a E 7 29 WAG S WING ios Revere ccecen coc ae shins sce once ciate anna ENO 7 31 Temperature Sor ced op c
258. or 2000 operating system e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher e 64 MB minimum RAM 128 MB RAM recommended e 80 MB hard drive space e 800 x 600 minimum 256 color display 1024 x 768 32 bit color recommended QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 5 Select Model Step 5 Select Model When you start ESP the model menu will appear Select a Model Current Current Legacy ejeje ojc ease u Gs 630 Ges 370 M5 890 MS eae MS Conmect EZ Match 2100 eseoee Quadrus MINI ate Quads MINT MINI Hawk D Hawk Velocity FTIT HS 20 MS O Mobile Hawk OQuadrus Verifier HE 4x7 Description Hes Hawk 1 Show this dialog at startup C Skip EZ Mode 1 Click the button showing the QX Hawk 2 Click OK Note You can also simply double click the button showing your imager to make your selection 3 Click Yes when the following dialog appears 1 6 Would vou like bo connect to the Oy Hawk Note If you need to select another model later click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model gt New Model in the menu toolbar QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 6 Connect Connection Wizard To connect using the Connection Wizard e Click Connect on the menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard e Select RS 232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display e Configure settings as required by the applicati
259. or all RS232 and RS422 485 activity LNK Blinking green with Tx data activity ACT Blinking green with Rx data activity Note Red is never turned on Protocol Activity If EtherNet IP is enabled MOD Module status per EtherNet IP specification NET Network status per EtherNet IP specification Otherwise the MOD and NET LEDs are always off QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 115 I O Parameters Bar Graph Read Rate Auto Calibration Bar Code Configuration and Read Cycle Result all share the Bar Graph 20 100 LEDs Status Indicators PHY Activity EEC F i Rate Good Read NO 1 Disabled oe Read Rate Good Read I O 1 I O 1 always shows the combined state of the discrete outputs If any output is active the I O 1 LED will be on Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate I output Active NO Z2 I O 2 I O 2 always shows the state of the hardware input trigger If the trigger is active I O 2 will be on Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate DOl Qukput Active E i Active Disabled Output Active HPL t fan ct i Wee 5 116 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Calibration Options This command specifies the operation of the calibration feature The default configuration is setup to perform calibration on gain focus and symbol type Shutter speed is disabled as the default setting since shutter speed is more of
260. ors 1 3 and T The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T can be broken using the Trigger switch This isolates trigger signals as required A 8 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety noise reduction and the protection of equipment from voltage transients Buildings including any steelwork all circuits and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes Poem sw geL a RO es a cee UNO Cie GS th Sp aa Sa A go OR e A a So rae o ET HERNET A i i F a g weg ash ee Ga eg A ao cide a e g a Te awae aa gt oe ew ci a Oo SN ts o DEVICE F a a eee POWER amp S24 A A ob 2 AS ook KR amp amp awe we amp oS oe ee kh ove ew es en eee SUPPLY 2 2 2 L L ee ee ee ict oe 3 a a ps peua RS232 422 485 se se amp 2 oo we eS fee mks eto a eo DEVICE 2 ee cunning An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the imager Ground Loops Ground loops signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host imager and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 9 Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts Expected Powe
261. orts not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the Polling Mode Options The imager always follows the protocol in both directions to and from the host There is no option to disable it from either direction Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 4 ATK NAK Options RES ALL REQ ALL STS ML ETS ALL ACE ALK MAF MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STX ETX ETX ACE ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout J LEC Status Disabled RES NAK Defaults RES Reset NUL 0x00 REQ Request NUL 0x00 STX Start of Text NUL 0x00 ETX End of Text NUL 0x00 ACK Acknowledge ACK 0x06 NAK Negative Acknowledge NAK 0x15 5 24 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters ACK NAK Protocol The following are general outlines of the ACK NAK protocol Items that are framed by brackets can either be disabled or enabled LRC does not include STX but it does include preamble postamble and ETX Symbol Data Output TX to host STX preamble SYMBOL DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble or timeout waiting for more data are detected if REQ is disabled depending on what is enabled Commands from Host to Imager TX to Imager STX lt command gt ETX LRC Response from Imager ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX or command ending angle bracket gt are received depending on what is enabled
262. ost data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON During the XOFF phase the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices Used only with RS 232 This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start Q or stop 4S Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Used only with RS 232 This option is a combination of Point to Point with RTS CTS and Point to Point with XON XOFF ACK NAK See ACK NAK Options Polling Mode see Polling Mode Options 5 22 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Address The Protocol Address can be any number between 1 and 50 Protocol Selection Point to Point Address lt 1 50 Protocol Port R5232 A ACK f MAK Options RES MUL REQ NUL STs MUL ETH MUL ALK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EGT REQ ENG oT oTa ETs ETs ALK ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout 5 LRZ Status Disabled Protocol Port RS 232 A or RS 422 can be used as Protocol Ports Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port AS29324 ACE f MAK Options RES REG MUL STs MUL ETs MLL ALK ALK MAK HAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STs ST ETS ETs ALK ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout D LAZ Status Disabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 23 Communication ACK NAK Options These parameters take effect for ACK NAK on the main RS 232 or RS 422 p
263. output in the third output position QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 27 Output Format Output Format Enable Output Format This is a global enable disable parameter Use Set Number of Symbols and Output Phrase to assign symbols for formatting and Symbol Parse to determine the specific output content for the assigned symbols On the Output Format tab check the Enable Output Format box Video Evaluation Calibration WOT Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Dynamic Setup Enable Output Format Auto Sync with Reader Set Number of Symbols 1 3 Output Phrase Prearnible Symbol 1 Postamble Enable Parse Enable Parse Symbols j send and Save 4 Quality Parameters P Show Parse Table 4 28 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Set Number of Symbols Number of Symbols determines the number of symbols to which output formatting will apply Output Phrase Output Phrase refers to the user defined Preamble selected symbols and Postamble sequence in the read cycle result Enable Output Format eat aay Use the Set Number of Symbols spin box to Set Number of Spmbols 5 lt determine the number of symbols to be included in the output phrase Output Phrase Symbol Preamble Symbol 1 Separator Symbol H2 Symbol 3 Symbol 4 Symbol 5 Postamble Enable Parse Parse Parte Parse Parse
264. owth Disabled Axial Mon uniForrnity Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Symbol Contrast Outputs the candidate symbol s Symbol Contrast value Print Growth Outputs the candidate symbol s Print Growth value Axial Non Uniformity Outputs the candidate symbol s Axial Non Uniformity value Unused ECC Outputs the candidate symbol s Unused ECC value QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters 5 157 Symbol Quality Grading Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled Percent Cell Damage The percent of symbol cells that are damaged Capture Time The amount of time the imager required to capture the area in which the symbol was located Locate Time The amount of time the imager required to locate the symbol Decode Time The amount of time the imager required to decode the symbol Pixels Per Element The average number of pixels in a symbol element ECC Level The level of error correction used when decoding the symbol Matrix Size The size of the symbol s matrix area the area composed of the symbol s elements Quiet Zone The size of the quiet zone around the symbol Symbol Angle The angle at which the symbol is printed or marked 5 158 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Report Tab
265. parameter lt K525 gt The imager comes with a default focal curve based on unit averages When this isn t close enough to obtain all distances the lt OPTIC gt command can be used to start a 2 point test to normalize the focal distance and improve accuracy This should generally be done with lenses that were not originally shipped with the imager The table below shows the setting and test requirements to improve distance parameter accuracy Lens Type and Command Inside Test Requirements Outside Test Requirements lt K525 1 gt UHD 15 ee Data Matrix T Data Matrix lt K525 2 gt HD 30 A Eea i Data Matrix TE Data Matrix lt K525 3 gt SD 45 eee Data Matrix a pee Data Matrix 7 22 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Default Reset Save Understanding and controlling the imager s active saved and default settings is critical to its successful operation Utilities Serial a Function Cmd ESP EZ Button a l Save to Reader 3 5 Reset Will not save for power on lt A gt Send No Save No V gt x Reset and Recall Microscan Default Be g Barameters lt Ard gt Send lt Ard gt from Terminal No X E Reset and Recall Power On Parameters lt Arp gt Send lt Arp gt from Terminal No u cei ai Customer Default lt Arc gt Send lt Arc gt from Terminal No Save to Reader Save Current Settings for Power On lt Z gt Send and
266. pins are located Connecting the wrong pins could cause serious damage to the unit 3 Momentarily connect these wires or pins and listen for a series of short beeps 4 Within 3 seconds connect them again A longer beep should be heard If not repeat the process Default on Power On Use the EZ Button to default the imager by holding it down while applying power to the imager if this feature is enabled 7 24 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Imager Status lt gt Imager Status Request The imager responds to a status request lt gt with a two character hex value such as lt 22 gt To determine status 1 Look up the binary conversion in the table below For example the first hex 2 would be 0 0 1 0 in binary as read from binary digits 3 through 0 the second hex 2 is also 0 0 1 0 as read from binary digits 7 through 4 2 Next enter your binary values from the table below in the Binary column next to the appropriate bit Bit Binary Imager Status 0 o Commanderor detected 2 0 Communication error detected Binary Bit Digits Value 7 6 5 4 3 2 17 3 0 Flash sector unprotect failure 4 0 Host Aux port buffer overflow Imager is in a read cycle 3 Under Binary interpret 1s as true and Os as not true For example bit 1 has a 1 in the Binary column indicating Command Received Bit 5 is also a 1 indicating that the Imager is in a read
267. ple f Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol and Match Start Position is set to 2 only the 2nd through 7th characters from left to right will be compared Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater When Match Start Position is set to 0 no comparison will occur Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position m Match Length i 1 3000 Wild Card r Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Skep l Hew Master Pin Disabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 165 Matchcode Wild Card Example With Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk defining CR 34 as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134 and CR234 but not CR2345 Entering the wild card at the end of the master symbol as in CR will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1 CR23 CR358 etc Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol Mabchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment 5 166 Match Start Position Match Length Wild Card J Sequence on Mo Read Sequence on Mismatch NUL SOH STs ETH EUT ENQ Sequence Skep Mew Master Fin ACK BEL Bs HT LF T FF CH SU SI DLE nc DC2 DE3 DC4 NAK SiN ETB CAN EM SUB ESL FS GS RS
268. pture and ae Display Options decode a symbol save it as a digital Curent Z Good Read sie ee ameme file and perform histogram and line H saved I Novead Cy Decode Good Read scan evaluations E valuation Age 0 Histogram When you click on the Evaluation tab you will see the images that are currently stored in the imager Click Receive to refresh this view Click Capture Decode to display the and decode event will occur regardless of read cycle settings Click Read to trigger a read cycle If there is enough time in the read cycle up to 32 good reads or 6 full scale images can be captured and displayed depending on the size of the images and depending on the number enabled in Number of Captures under Capture Mode in the Camera Setup menu tree to the left of the tabs If you click Save the current image will be saved to the location of your choice Note An image can only be saved in the format in which it was uploaded to ESP JPEG images will be saved as jpg and bitmaps will be saved as bmp When you click the JPEG Image box notice that the Line Scan button is grayed out The JPEG option allows faster captures and transfers but since the JPEG standard compresses image data it is not suitable for the more rigorous demands of line scan evaluation JPEG also allows you to adjust the image quality resolution by adjusting the sliding tab between 1 and 100 1 being the lowest quality and 10
269. put On 0 Decodes per Trigger D E 65535 5 130 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 E Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Frink Growth Disabled Output on Axial Mon uniformits Disabled Output on Unused ECC Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade Z Print Growth Threshold Grade Z Axial Mon uniformity Threshold Grade Z Unused ECC Threshold Grade Z Output on Symbol Contrast The symbol contrast is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled ka Disabled Enabled Output on Print Growth The print growth is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Print Growth Disabled w izabled Enabled Output on Axial Non Uniformity The axial non uniformity is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value Output on Axial Mon unirormity Disabled al Djsabled Enabled Output On Unused ECC The unused ECC is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value D izabled Dijsabled Qutput on Unused ECC Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 131 I O Parameters Symbol Contrast Threshold This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output Output w
270. put on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt Symbol Quality Output 3 lt K802 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt Output 1 Parameters QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt A 47 Serial Commands Output 2 Parameters lt K811 output on output state pulse width outoput mode gt Output 3 Parameters lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Control Hex Output Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Control Options 0 Control 1 Hex Beeper Serial Cmd lt K702 beeper status gt Default 1 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read Quality Output Separator Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status
271. puters networks and the Internet 2 The Network Connections dialog will appear Double click the icon for the Local Area Connection being used in the application DER s Network Connections File Edit G sax gt i JO search E gt Folders EF amp Network Connections View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Address Network Tasks fl Create a new connection Change Windows Firewall settings See Also 4 Network Troubleshooter LAN or High Speed Internet Other Places Control Panel a My Network Places G My Documents 4 My Computer Ch L i LA C_ 1394 Connection Local Area Connection Local Area Connection 2 Local Area Connection 3 Wireless Network Connection Details Network Connections System Folder A 76 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cont 3 The Local Area Connection Status dialog will appear To check the host computer s connection settings click Details on the Support tab To verify connection status __ Local Area Connection Status On the Support tab click the Details button to bring up a list of Network Connection Details General Support Connection status ZAN Address Type Assigned by DHCP IP Address 162 148 88 35 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Deiak Gateway 162 148 26 1 Property Value Ph
272. r 4op Mode The following modes are accessible by clicking the buttons at the top of the screen Se amp 9 I 6 Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Setup Terminal Utilities Parameters e Click the EZ Mode button to return to EZ Mode e Click the Autoconnect button to establish communication e Click the Send Recv button to send or receive commands e Click the Switch Model button to open the model menu or to return to a previous model e Click the Parameters button to show the tabbed tree controls for Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics e Click the Setup button to access the Camera Setup tree control and the tabbed interfaces for Video Evaluation Calibration Window of Interest WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format and Dynamic Setup e Click the Terminal button to display decoded symbol data and to send serial commands to the imager using text or macros e Click the Utilities button to show the tabbed interfaces for Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences from Default Master Database and Firmware For further details see ESP Help in the dropdown Help menu Quick Stark Help N About ESF Contacting Microscan QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 13 Save Changes Step 11 Save Changes To make changes to configuration settings in the tree controls
273. r e The number of captures represents the number of triggers expected from the system per read cycle The first trigger enters the read cycle e Subsequent triggers initiate captures in the read cycle up to the number of captures is met or the end of read cycle condition is met Any additional triggers between reaching the number of captures and meeting the end of read cycle requirements will be ignored e If the read cycle is fully qualified prior to reaching the number of captures and the symbol output is set to ASAP the symbol data will be output and all post processing Logic outputs video etc will finish but the imager will remain in the read cycle When enough triggers come in to satisfy the number of captures setting or a timeout expires the imager will exit the read cycle This operation would be synonymous with level triggered read cycle waiting for the trigger to fall e If the end of read cycle is set for new trigger and the read cycle qualifications have not been met the read cycle will exit upon receiving the first trigger after reaching the number of captures setting At this time the post processing from the read cycle will complete and a new read cycle will begin 5 56 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Capture Time This command specifies the frame delays associated with the frames captured in a rapid capture mode of operation Time Before 1st Capture This value specifies the delay from the tri
274. r s Manual Position the Imager Step 3 Position the Imager e Position the imager at a focal distance of one inch or more from a test symbol e Tip the imager relative to the symbol to avoid the glare of direct Specular reflection The case parting line should be perpendicular to the plane of the symbol by either pitching the symbol or the imager as shown e Symbols can be rotated tilted at any angle however for best results symbols should be aligned with the field of view In the case of linear symbols aligning the bars in the direction of their movement ladder orientation will minimize the chances of blurring and will result in more consistent decodes Imager and Symbol Orientation Important Avoid excessive skew or pitch Maximum skew is 30 maximum pitch is 30 The illustration below shows skew axis pitch axis and tilt axis Skew lt D Ym Maximum skew tilt and pitch 30 om Imager Symbol 1 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 4 Install ESP ESP Software can be found on the Microscan Tools CD that is packaged with the QX Hawk 1 Follow the prompts to install ESP from the CD 2 Click on the ESP icon to run the program Note ESP can also be installed from the Download Center at www microscan com Minimum System Requirements e 166 MHz Pentium processor Pentium II processor recommended e Windows Vista XP
275. r to the symbol s direction of travel Pitch Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol length on the Substrate See the illustration below Skew lt Symbol or other object 2 Tilt of interest y i Pitch Imager Pixel An individual element in a digitized image array picture element PLC See Programmable Logic Controller Port Logical circuit for data entry and exit One or more ports may be included within a single connector Processing Time The time used by a vision system to receive analyze and interpret image information Often expressed in parts per minute Programmable Logic Controller PLC An electronic device used in industrial automation environments such as factory assembly lines and automotive manufacturing facilities Progressive Scan A non interlaced scan that doubles the number of visible picture lines per field by displaying all picture lines at once Protocol The rules for communication between devices providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices RAM See Random Access Memory Random Access Memory RAM A data storage system used in computers composed of integrated circuits that allow access to stored data in any sequence without movement of physical parts Read Cycle A programmed period of time or condition during which a reader will accept symbol input Read On
276. r and Ground Connections for Proper Operation SCANNER INTERFACE In Line Filtering POWER 3 TERMINAL POWER RETURN POWER amp EARTH SUPPLY SF Shunt Filtering POWER GUD POWER 2 TERMINAL POWER RETURH SUPPLY EARTH local to power source connected to RETURN at main power panel CHASSIS GND COMM SGHLS SIGHAL GHD IF CONDUCTIVE MOUNTING BRACKET IS GROUNDED TO EARTH POTENTIAL THEN POTENTIAL MUST BE SAME AS EARTH AT POWER SOURCE Er et MOUNTING BRACKET Notes e Ensure that mounting bracket Earth is at the same potential as power source Earth e Supply Return and Earth ground must be stable low impedance reference points e 2 Terminal Power Supply must still provide an Earth connection to the imager e Signal Ground can be used for communications and or discrete signal ground reference It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground A 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts Microscan offers two flying leads cordsets 61 000166 01 and 61 00016 7 01 for use in QX hardware configurations The diagrams below show the correspondence of wire colors to pins 61 000166 01 QX Cordset M12 12 Pin Plug Flying Leads The 61 000166 01 cordset connects to QX Hawk Connector B serial and QX 1 Connector 2 BROWN 3000 50 GREEN 100 20 GREY
277. ration Locate Calibrate Learn The calibration routine optimizes the imager by comparing Read Rates at various camera and image processing settings Click Locate to find the symbol in the field of view and display it in the video view Then click Calibrate to begin the calibration routine The Learn button allows you to save information about the next Data Matrix symbol decoded which allows faster and more consistent processing Test Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test for a quick indication of the imager s read capabilities and the limits of the application When Decodes per Second is unchecked the test will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans Click Stop to end the test EF ESP Untitled E a arr Click Locate to find and display the symbol Click Calibrate to begin the j calibration routine Calibration is also explained in Quick Start Click Learn to save information about the next Data Matrix symbol decoded hi App Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Tran Welcome to Easy Setup Program 1 First position the imager at the desired Focal Distance Note fo avoid glare set ine angle of the reader l about 75 degrees relative to the symbol Click here to 2 Click Locate to begin initiate aise a sliding ick Test button to focus Click the App Mode button start the Read Rate control to acc
278. rce iI A Echo to Source AS2s2 B Output at End of Read Cycle Andee Output at ETY i aah l Mutouk ab Timeout FtheretelP Ambles to Source Enables or Disables the ability to send Preambles and Postambles to the Source port External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS23532 4 Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Mutou at ETX Mutpuer at Timeout 2 U0 Echo to Source Enables or Disables the ability to send an Echo to the Source port External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS s2 A Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Output ak ETH Enabled Qukouk ak Timeout 200 Output at End of Read Cycle Enables or Disables the ability to output data at the end of read cycle External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSZ 4 Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Dutput at ET meda Output at Timeout Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 33 Communication Output at ETX Determines the output at ETX External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSZ A Ambles ko Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Mutput at ET Output at Teac PCR NUL SOH STx ET EOT ENG ACK BEL es HT LF VT FF T s0 si DLe oct De2 Dca Ocal NAK SYN ETB an Em sue ESC F
279. re compliance requirements this device must not be co located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE The QX Hawk has been tested for compliance with CE Conformit Europ enne standards and guidelines and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards specifically the following requirements General Immunity for Light Industry EN 55024 1998 ITE Immunity Standard Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE Equipment EN 55022 98 ITE Disturbances The QX Hawk has been tested by an independent electromagnetic compatibility laboratory in accordance with the applicable specifications and instructions QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual vii Statement of ROHS Compliance Statement of ROHS Compliance All Microscan readers with a G suffix in the FIS number are ROHS Compliant All compliant readers were converted prior to March 1 2007 All standard accessories in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog are ROHS Compliant except 20 500013 01 and 98 000039 02 These products meet all the requirements of the European Parliament and the Council of the European Union for ROHS compliance In accordance with the latest requirements our ROoHS compliant products and packaging do not contain intentionally added Deca BDE Perfluorooctanes PFOS or Perfluorooctanoic
280. reen On Startup Toolbar Style i Show Model Prornpt C Only Show leon Receive After Connect Skip EZ Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Settings Reload Last File At startup reloads the last file saved to the host computer s hard drive Show Model Prompt At startup shows the model menu displaying all supported readers Show Connect Prompt At startup displays the Would you like to connect to the QX Hawk prompt Receive After Connect At startup loads the imager s settings into ESP This is not recommended if ESP settings are needed for future use Skip EZ Mode At startup skips EZ Mode and opens directly in App Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults At startup enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send Recv command 2 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Terminal Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced V Show Non Printable Characters Default Format Fast Change Echo Font C Enhanced Format Slower Enable Echo Change Keyboard Macros Background Color Blue Vv Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus Default Settings OK Cancel Show Non Printable Characters When Show Non Printable Characters is enabled characters such as CRLF will be displayed in the Terminal window When Enhanced Format is checked the
281. rial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHex Gukpuk Control Control Hex 5 104 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters EZ Trax Output EZ Trax Output Status When EZ Trax output is enabled the imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options EZ Trax will not function unless enabled Enabled Sele Trax Output Comm Port Image Mode Enabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 90 Object Info Gukpuk Disabled Grade Output Disabled Comm Port selects the communication port that will be used to transfer image files EZ Trax Output Disabled Comm Fort Host E Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled Image Mode Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file output EZ Trax Output Disabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Both Noread and Good Aead Image Format Disabled JPEG Quality Good Read Object Info Gukpuk Noread 7 Grade Output au Noread and Good Read ismatch QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 105 I O Parameters Image Format Selects the format of the image output file EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed ai JPEG Quality Object Info Output Compressed Grade Output Disabled JPEG Quality Sets the amount of JPEG image compression A value of 1 represents
282. rleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplementals type UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Phaniacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value background gt Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt DataBar Omnidirectional lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt MicroPDF417 lt K485 status unused fixed length status fixed symbol length gt Composite Symbology Status Compo
283. rs Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Non Delimited 0x00 NUL Stop Character Mon Delimited 0x00 NUL Character Delimited Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Serial Trigger Character Delimited Start Character Mon Delimite AP Stop Character Mon Delimite 50H STX ETX EOT ENG ACK ELE ET FF cn so si DLE De1 Del De3 DC4 NAk SYN ETB CANI Em subj Esc FS GS RS us SP Click Delete to remove characters Note Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge trigger mode must be enabled for Serial Trigger Character to function 5 48 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Start Character Non Delimited Useful in applications where different characters are required to start a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Start characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Start trigger characters the following rules apply e In External Edge the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that m
284. s 0 Timeout 1 New Trigger 2 Timeout or New Trigger 3 Last Frame 4 Last Frame or New Trigger Read Cycle Timeout Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 100 x10 ms 1 second Options 1 to 65535 Decodes Before Output Decodes Before Output Serial Cmd lt K221 decodes before output mode gt Default 1 Options 1 to 255 Mode Serial Cmd lt K221 decodes before output mode gt Default 0 Non Consecutive Options 0 Non Consecutive 1 Consecutive Multisymbol Number of Symbols Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default 1 Options 1 to 100 Multisymbol Separator Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character A 32 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Start Trigger Start Character Non Delimited Serial Cmd lt K229 start character gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Stop Trigger Stop Character Non Delimited Serial Cmd lt K230 stop character gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Processing Timeout Serial Cmd lt K245 processing timeout gt Default 200 0 2 seconds Options 1 to 65535 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 33 Serial Commands Configuration Database N
285. s database index Code 39 If enabled Code 39 will be active for this database index Interleaved 2of 5 If enabled Interleaved 2of 5 will be active for this database index PDF417 If enabled PDF417 will be active for this database index MicroPDF417 If enabled MicroPDF417 will be active for this database index Pharmacode If enabled Pharmacode will be active for this database index DataBar 14 If enabled DataBar 14 will be active for this database index DataBar Limited If enabled DataBar Limited will be active for this database index DataBar Extended If enabled DataBar Extended will be active for this database index QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 19 Configuration Database Database and Capture Modes The configuration database behaves the same for both Rapid and Continuous Capture Mode the only discernable difference is in Rapid capture mode the database incrementing always operates in Number of Image Frames with a frame count of 1 Camera Settings When the database loads a camera configuration and there is a change in shutter speed integration time window of interest WOI or sub sampling from the last image that was captured Then one image frame needs to be processed to setup the new configuration prior to capturing an image The capture will start immediately following the integration period If the image dimensions are configured as a Region o
286. s not fall into this range is rejected as an invalid symbol Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range Range Mode Status Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 74 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Codabar Used in photo finishing and library applications Previously used in medical applications but not typically used in newer medical applications Codabar is a 16 bit character set 0 through 9 and the characters and with start stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths Codabar Disabled Start and Stop Match Status Enabled Start and Stop Oukput Status Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Symbol Length 10 Check Character Type Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Start and Stop Match Status When disabled the imager will decode Codabar symbols whether or not the start and stop characters are the same When enabled the imager will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same Start and Stop Match Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Start and Stop Output Status When disabled the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol When enabled the start and stop characters will be present in the data output of the decoded symbol Note
287. s that the imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 0 74 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 85 Symbologies DataBar Limited Note DataBar Limited was previously known as RSS Limited DataBar Limited is designed to be read by laser scanners and CCD imagers It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot imagers Encodes a smaller 14 digit symbol 74 modules wide that is not omnidirectional DataBar Limited Disabled Disabled Enabled DataBar Omnidirectional Note DataBar Omnidirectional was previously known as RSS 14 Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where 14 digit EAN item identification may be needed DataBar 14 is a fixed symbol length symbology that encodes 14 digits including a 1 digit indicator DataBar 14 is 96 modules wide It can be stacked in two rows it can read omnidirectionally if printed in full height or horizontally if height truncated for small marking Note Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance instead of 2 stacked decode both stacked and non stacked DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled DO yjzabled Enabled 5 86 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters PDF417 Used in applications where a large amount of information over 32 characters needs to be e
288. s the number system character the next five are the manufacturer number the next five are the product number and the last digit is the checksum character When enabled the imager will read UPC Version A and UPC Version E only UPCIESN Disabled EAN Status Disabled Supplementals Status Disabled Separator Status Disabled Separator Character i Supplementals Type Both UPC E as UPC 4 Disabled EAN Status EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European retail applications Note UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect EAN is a subset of UPC When enabled the imager will read UPC Version A UPC Version E EAN 13 and EAN 8 It also appends a leading zero to UPC Version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC Version A symbols is not desired disable EAN EAN Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Note The extra character identifies the country of origin 5 78 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Supplementals Status Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required the imager reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes Supplementals Status Disabled Disabled Enabled Required Disabled UPC Supplementals will not be decoded Enabled Wh
289. save the settings to the corresponding filter Wildcard Character E Placeholder Character 2 Database Number Any im Decode Direction Either 4 26 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Rules for Output Filter Configuration Output Filter Configuration Rule 1 Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record There is an exception to this rule however when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters In such a case unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions For example if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 5 active filters the last position can be filled by any unfiltered qualified symbol Output Filter Configuration Rule 2 The same filter setup can be used multiple times For example filters 1 2 and 3 can be set up to filter Code 39 symbols and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded Output Filter Configuration Rule 3 All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the matching filter position If a symbol matches filter 3 it will be output as the third symbol If a filter does not have a matching qualified symbol a No Read message will be output in place of the symbol assuming the No Read message is enabled For example if there is not a symbol that meets filter 3 s requirements then a No Read message will be
290. selected extraction range is characters 2 4 The Sample Symbol example on the Symbol Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired Simultaneously the data string from the selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left of the Parse Table followed by the user defined extracted output 4 30 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Insert Symbol Parse Step Insert Data Extract Range Insert 50 sTx ETX E0T ENG ACK BEL Bs HT LF E eT si pct Dc2 Dea Deal Nak SYN ETB CAN EM sue Esc _Fs 63 AS us SP Click Delete to remove characters Add Insert Step Add Extract Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCOEFGHWELMANOPOR STUY wey 201 23456709 Output The Insert process is very similar to the Extract process except that Insert allows the user to enter characters using the Insert calculator shown above Parse Symbols Send and Save Y Hide Parse Table Symbol Parse Build Sequence Shep Insert Data Extract Range Insert SP SP Extract 3 5 Shep Insert Data Extract Range Inzert cP SF Extract 3 5 Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Table Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMN OPFQRS TOV 201 23456709 Add Insert Step me Output COE A Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCOEFGHMWELMNOPORS TU wra 23456 789 Output CO
291. separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Character UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Supplemental Type UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Both Options 0 Both 1 2 characters only 2 5 characters only Format UPC E as UPC A UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 40 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixe
292. ser s Manual Parameters Row and Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest will be modified to frame the symbol plus an addition margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI margin parameter Row If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest rows will be modified to horizontally frame the symbol plus an addition margin determined by the WOI margin parameter Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest columns will be modified to vertically frame the symbol plus an addition margin determined by the WOI margin parameter Window of Interest Margin Sets the margin size that is applied to the calibrated label and is specified in number of pixels If margin causes image to exceed maximum image size it will be reduced accordingly Calibration Options Gain Calibrate Shutter Speed Don t Calibrate Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Window of Interest Framing Don t Calibrate Window of Interest Margin 20 1280 pixels r QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 121 I O Parameters Database Identifier Output Useful in tracking which database entries read which symbols Database Identifier Output Status Database Identifier Qutput Disabled Separator Character SP Disabled When this command is disabled no database identifier information will be output Enabled When this command is enabled
293. ser s Manual Quick Start Step 8 Calibrate Imager settings can be adjusted automatically for optimum performance by either the EZ Button or by ESP During the calibration routine the imager will flash its amber Read Rate percent LEDs and illumination LEDs while searching camera settings and determining the best configuration for decoding symbol data Upon successful completion of this routine a green LED pattern will flash brightly and illuminate the symbol If unsuccessful the imager will emit 5 short beeps and stop searching Calibrate by ESP 1 Click the Calibrate button Calibrate 2 The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data A successful calibration will display a green frame around the symbol and the following message will appear Uploading all reader parameters After a moment the symbol data will be presented in the field below the image display window Calibrate by EZ Button 1 Hold down the EZ Button for about two seconds and release when you hear two short beeps The 20 and 40 LEDs will illuminate 2 The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data Note To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release Calibrate by Serial Command Send lt CAL gt from a terminal program to begin auto calibration QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 1 11
294. sfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data imager_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX imager_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX Ox1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX HOST_TX ACK imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST _TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached imager_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 71 Protocol Commands Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data imager_TX Ox1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached imager_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST _TX NAK Host rejects data frame
295. site Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Separator Status Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 35 Serial Commands Separator Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol
296. smatch Send configuration settings to the imager without saving by clicking Send to Reader Click Save As to save the Send configuration settings to the report as plain text or a imager and save in ESP by clicking tab delimited text file Send and Save e To create a symbol containing any of the command settings in the table click Generate Barcode e To save the Differences from Default report either as plain text or as a tab delimited text file click Save As e Click Send and Save to send the settings to the imager and save them or Send to Reader to send the settings without saving them Important To use Differences from Default connect to the imager and Receive Reader Settings via the Send Recv button on the toolbar 7 10 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Master Database Click the Utilities button and then the Master Database Utilities tab to display the Master Database view Important The Master Database is used for all Matchcode modes except Sequential and Wild Card both of which use Master Database Index 1 Master Database Overview Used where more than one master symbol is required as in a Multisymbol setup for matching and other Matchcode operations Allows the user to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database which can be entered by keyboard scanned in displayed or deleted by serial or ESP
297. st meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Examples e Filter data 123 This will match data strings of 123 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 e Filter data 123 AB C This will be interpreted as 123 e Filter data 123 This will match 1234 and 123A but not 123 12345 or 1234C e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A and 123BA but not 123 1234C or 1234ABCD e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234AB and 123BAT but not 1234A or 123BATS e Filter data 12 This will match 1234 1234560 and 123ABC but not 12 or 123 e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A 123BA and 123BATS but not 1234 or 1234C QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 25 Ordered Output Ordered Output Filter Settings Ordered Output Filter Settings Ed Filter 1 Criteria Symbalogy Type Any Type n seeli Double clicking on a row in the Ordered Output table brings up the Enter Match String Ordered Output Filter Settings __ dialog Matching String Use these settings to determine Symbology Type Length of the ASCII Lookup CF Addto Match Sting Sang ACC Lookin Wildcard Character Placeholder Character Database Number and Decode Match Sting Detnables Direction Click Apply to
298. symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Normal Options 0 Normal 1 High 2 Highest A 42 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 10 Options
299. t Display DSP Code Checksum lt rb key gt Roll Back Application Code lt gt Imager Status Request lt K gt All Status Request lt K gt All Descriptor Request imager Statue lt K gt All Range Request lt Knnn gt Single Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Request lt Knnn gt Single Range Request lt Knnnd gt Single Command Default lt LEARN gt Initiate Learn Operation Learn lt UNLEARN gt Initiate Unlearn Operation lt LEARN gt Display Learn Status lt G gt Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index 1 Master Database lt Gn gt Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status lt C gt Enter Decodes Second Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Decode Percent Test lt J gt Exit Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests Reboot System lt reboot gt Cold Boot System from Boot Code Static Validation lt VAL gt Perform Static Validation of Data Matrix Symbol f lt I1 gt Activate Targeting System Targeting lt l0 gt De activate Targeting System Temperature lt TEMP gt Display Image Sensor Temperature lt Uy P ee tile Y Modem Upload Y Modem Transfer Options lt dy image file name gt Y Modem Download Image lt dy key gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Y Modem Download Code Read Rate Read Rate i Click the Utilities button and then the Read Rate tab to Utilities display the Read Rate view E F ESP Untitled Fie Model Options Connec
300. t Read only lt K407 gt returns hours minutes Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt User Defined Name lt K412 user defined name gt Hours Since Reset Read only Hours Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt 16 bit counter 0 to 65535 Minutes Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt 16 bit counter 0 to 60 Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default SERVICE Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Threshold Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 300 5 minutes Options 1 to 65535 Resolution Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Seconds Options 0 Seconds 1 Minutes User Defined Name Serial Cmd lt K412 user defined name gt Default QX Hawk Options Any valid ASCII string up to 50 characters A 58 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder CHI PH Dre C
301. t View Help 4e 138d Ez Mode Autoconnect SendfRecy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware 2 i To see the number of decodes per second click the Decodes sec radio button and O Percent A7 Clear Output then the Start button To see the percentage of decodes click the Percent radio button and then the Start button To end a Read Rate test click the Stop Read Rate information is displayed in button the Start button becomes a Stop the lower portion of the Utilities view button during an active Read Rate test Serial commands can also be sent to the imager from this screen For Help press Fi Qx Hank DEMEDEN Foint to Point GK Hake Important When Read Rate is enabled the Configuration Database is not active regardless of how the imager is configured 7 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Read Rate Serial Utility Commands Enter Decodes Second Test Sending lt C gt instructs the imager to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data if any The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the imager during setup Enter Decode Percent Test Sending lt Cp gt instructs the imager to transmit the percentage of decodes and any decoded symbol data
302. t as a Overall Grade Based On Bitmap or JPEG image file W Symbol Contrast W Print Growth W Axial Nonuniforrnity Enables ESP to parse UII symbol data into the correct M Unused ECC fields and output order defined by the U S Department of Defense IUID initiative if Enable UIl Parsing lt lt Detault Settings Revert Settings Returns all settings to Returns all settings to default most recent QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 161 Matchcode Matchcode tree control tabs 7 Parameters Parameters ESP Values Mabchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 Match Length 1 Wild Card i Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH _ AC i Mismatch Replace Disabled ne Replacement String a nabled To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the App Mode Then click the Matchcode tab to display the Matchcode tree control The indicates that the setting is the default Note Matchcode settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format R
303. tate Input 1 Disabled Active State Active Open Actve Open Active Closed Active Open Input function is activated when input state is de energized Active Closed Input function is activated when input state is energized QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 123 I O Parameters Output 1 Parameters Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory B Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read a Output State Mismatch or No Read Pulse width Match for Good Read Output Mode Mismatch Trend Analysis No Read Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality H Diagnostics Diagnostic Warning ln Read Cycle Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Re
304. tatus is set to Disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 2 or Symbol Length 1 to be considered a valid symbol lf Range Mode Status is set to Enabled Symbol Length 2 and Symbol Length 1 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbol Length 2 0 64 Guard Bar Note Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the presence of guard bars is required for decoding to take place Useful when Interleaved 2 of 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols A guard bar is a heavy bar at least twice the width of the wide bar surrounding the printed Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads Guard Bar Disabled D i fa b d x Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 73 Symbologies Range Mode Status Important Unless Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length must be set to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required When Range Mode is disabled the imager checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values then it is rejected as invalid When Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths Any symbol length that doe
305. the double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Communication settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 4 3 Camera Setup Camera Settings B C Camera Settings ain 20 Shutter Speed 2500 Gain Sets the gain value for the image sensor This setting can be configured through autocalibration and is the recommended method for configuring this settings A higher can value will increase the brightness of the image but the noise performance of the system is reduced Prior to configuring the gain the required shutter speed should be set and the gain should be configured to optimize the shutter speed setting Lamera Settings 0 33 Shutter Speed 2500 Shutter Speed This value sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical If an object is moving fast and a slow shutter speed is selected blurring or smearing of the object will occur As shutter speed is increased the amount of light required or gain needed has to be increased since the pixels exposure time has decreased Camera Settings ain 2 Shutter Speed 2500 30 250 000 4 4 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Illumination Type Mode Configures the illumination pattern Bright Field
306. the imager will append a two digit number and the characters DB to the data output following the separator for each symbol decoded using Configuration Database For example if the separator is an underscore character and the second database entry reads a symbol encoded with data capture during the read cycle the symbol data output will be data capture DBO2 If the database is not active no identifiers will be attached to output Separator Character The separator character separates the symbol data from the database identifier Database Identifier Qukput Disabled Separator Character oF NUL SOH STx ET EOT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF VT aa LA St SI DLE DCI Click Delete to remove characters 5 122 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Input 1 Input 1 Disabled Active State Active Open Input Mode Determines the function of the Input pin Cisse Active State Weier Reset Counts Unlatch Output When set to Disabled the Input pin has no impact on operation Disabled Reset Counts When set to Reset Counts a transition to the active state of the Input will cause the imager to reset the internal counters Unlatch Output This setting is used in combination with any of the three outputs in Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin A transition to the active state will clear any of the three outputs that were previously latched Active S
307. the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 0 1 366 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 89 Symbologies Composite When set to Enabled or Required will decode the 2D composite component of a linear symbol The linear symbol can be DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded DataBar Limited EAN 128 UPC A EAN 13 EAN 8 and UPC E Composite Disabled Separator Status Disabled Separator i Enabled If Composite is set to Enabled the imager will decode both the 2D composite and linear components However if the 2D composite component is not decoded the linear data will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required If set to Required the imager must decode both components or a No Read will occur Separator Status Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Separates the linear and the composite component Separator Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Separator The Separator Character will be the same as the character defined in the Multisymbol Separator field As required by the application Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Separator NUL SOH STX ETX EOT Eng
308. tion Lighting of objects surfaces or particles at very shallow or low angles so that light does not directly enter a reader s optical hardware Depth of Field The in focus range of an imaging system Measured from the distance behind an object to the distance in front of the object with all objects appearing in focus Diffused Lighting Scattered soft lighting from a wide variety of angles used to eliminate shadows and specular glints from profiled highly reflective surfaces Digital to Analog Converter DAC A VLSI circuit used to convert digitally processed images to analog for display on a monitor Digital Imaging Conversion of an image into pixels by means of an Analog to Digital Converter where the level of each pixel can be stored digitally Digital Signal Processor DSP A VLSI chip designed for ultra high speed arithmetic processing Often imbedded in a vision engine Discrete I O Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur Direct Memory Access DMA A capability provided by some computer bus architectures that allows data to be sent directly to memory from an attached device DMA See Direct Memory Access DSP See Digital Signal Processor Dynamic Range The difference between the minimum and maximum thresholds of discernible images the amount of usable signal QX Hawk Industrial Imager User
309. tion diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC Status lt K145 status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain lt K150DAIS Y gt Protocol Selection lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt External Data Routing lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Array Communication Modes lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Read Cycle l Trigger Trigger Filter Duration Serial Trigger Character lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter duration trailing edge trigger filter duration gt lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 mode read cycle timeout gt Decodes Before Output lt K221 number before output gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Serial Trigger Start Character lt K229 start character gt S
310. tion which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help For connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class II and rated 10 to 28 VDC at 5 watts or greater European models must use a similarly rated Class or Class II power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950 Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous LED light radiation exposure There are no user serviceable parts in the imager Opening the imager voids the Microscan systems Inc warranty WARNING LED LIGHT DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT Light Output 564 mW Wavelength 470 525 617 nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 vi QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Introduction Statement of Agency Compliance FE The QX Hawk has been tested for compliance with FCC Federal Communications Commission regulations and has been found to conform to all applicable FCC Rules and Regulations To comply with FCC RF exposu
311. tion to the imager e Signal Ground can be used for communications and or discrete signal ground reference It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground 3 6 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Hardware Installation QX 1 Interface Device The QX 1 Interface Device s receptacles are physically the same as those on the QX Hawk but they do not have explicit pin assignments The QX 1 allows users to bus power and communications as required by the application QX 1 Interface Device Pin Assignment 1 10 28V 2 Trig NM Input 1 Common 3 Ground 4 Trigger ZA AA Connectors 1 and 3 are 12 pin plugs and Connector 2 is a 12 pin socket All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data as required by the application The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed QxX 1 Trigger Connector 4 pin Socket COMM4 0 POWER TRIGGER This simple diagram shown on the base of the QX 1 illustrates how power communications I O and trigger signal can be routed through the QX 1 device depending on the needs of the application The switches greatly increase signal routing flexibility QX 1 Communications I O QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Power Trigger 3 7 Power and Trigger Switching Power and Trigger Switching yf ty Power can be bussed between imagers and
312. tput when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Mormaly Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers Migaeics Number to Output On No Read Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers 5 128 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Number of Triggers Parameters The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 1 Parameters Mutoue On Mutpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Number to Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open 00 Pulse Mo Read D 0 255 O T Example I
313. ts RES Reset REQ Request STX Start of Text ETX End of Text ACK Acknowledge NAK Negative Acknowledge Polling Mode Options Serial Cmd RES NAK Defaults RES Reset REQ Request STX Start of Text ETX End of Text ACK Acknowledge NAK Negative Acknowledge 1 Enabled lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt 00 00 00 00 06 15 disabled disabled disabled disabled RN LL m A M lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt 04 05 02 03 06 15 Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain Serial Cmd lt K150DAISY gt A 26 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices ASCII Character Entry Modifier Commands that require ASCII text fields such as Preamble and Postamble commands can be sent to the imager as hex pairs see Appendix G ASCII Table for conversions Serial Cmd Format lt Knnnh 00 FF gt To enter ASCII fields as hex values 00 to FF add a lower case h directly after the command s K number and then enter the hex value that corresponds with the desired ASCII character Example Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs So to make gt the postamble in the symbol decode output enter the Postamble command as follows lt K142h 3E gt Note that the status field contains only a This is because the only field that is being changed is the postamble character
314. tus Code 39 large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt lt K471 status start stop match status start stop output status Codabar large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length check character type check character output status gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator Status separator character supplementals type UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Pharinacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value background gt Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol le
315. ual 5 155 Symbol Quality Global E Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Grade Total Read Time When enabled outputs the amount of time that was required by the imager to decode the symbol Global Total Read Time Disabled be Symbol Quality Separator Re aRRE Output Mode Enabled Symbol Quality Separator This field specifies the separator used to separate the quality output data Global Tokal Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator Output Mode NUL SH ST ET EOT ENG ACK BEL es HT LE f vT FF cR so s1 DLE Der e2 Dca DC NAK SYN ETE can Em sue ESC FS GS EJE Click Delete to remove characters Output Mode Determines how symbol quality evaluations will be output B Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Gade we 5 156 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Data Matrix Data Matrix B ISO TEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Print Growth Axial Mon uniForrnity Unused BOC B Grading Percent Cell Damage Capture Time Locate Time Decode Time Pixels Per Element ECC Level Matrix Size Quiet one Symbol Angle Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ISO IEC 16022 Parameters ISO TEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Disabled Print Gr
316. ues Read Cycle Mulkisymbal Trigger Mode Serial Data B Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 The indicates External Trigger State H Serial Trigger Decodes Before Gutput H End of Read Cycle Capture Mode Capture Time Store Mo Read Image Image Processing Settings E Ee that the setting Active Closed is the default Actye Clozed Continuous To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Read Cycle settings can also be sent to the imager from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Read Cycle section of Appendix E 5 40 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Read Cycle Setup Setting up read cycle and triggering parameters involves a series of decisions based on the particular application as follows 1 Select the number of symbols to be read in a single cycle 2 Decide on the trigger type to be used if serial choose a serial character if external choose either External Level or External Edge 3 Designate how the read cycle should end Timeout New Trigger QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 41 Read Cycle Multisymbol Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number quantity etc This feature allo
317. umber in the table type master symbol data in the popup dialog that appears and click OK 4 When all master symbol data has been entered click the Send Database to the Reader button Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Master Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index T z 5 A Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Header Master Symbol Data Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 Master Symbol 5 Master 5 Symbol Data Enter master symbol data in this field QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 13 Master Database Request Master Symbol Data Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10 1 Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab 2 Click the Receive Reader s Database button Masher Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index b E za Receve Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol After the size of the database is set the imager can read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number lt Gmaster symbol number gt To store the next symbol decoded as master symbol 1 send lt G gt or lt G1 gt To store the next symbol decoded as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number send lt Gmaster symbol number 1 10 gt For e
318. umber of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active indexes sort database gt lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins symbol type gt Configuration Database Load Current Setting lt K255 index gt Request Database Index Setting lt K255 index gt Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image Database Mode dimensions gt Number of Active Indexes Number of Active Indexes Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 to 10 Number of Database Cycles Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 to 255 A 34 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Appendices Symbologies Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Micro QR Code lt K459 status gt lt K470 status check character status check character output status Code 39 large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt lt K471 status start stop match status start stop output status Codabar large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length check character type check character output status gt Inte
319. ut Output filtering is a method of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle Each filter has settings for the following six parameters Filter Number Symbology Type Length Wildcard Placeholder Matching Data Decode Direction and Database Number Filter Number Symbology Type Length Wildcard Placeholder and Matching Data are all displayed in the table below Double clicking on any row of the table will display the Ordered Output Filter Settings dialog where settings can be changed Filter Mumber A a 4 a Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Dynamic Setup Symbology Length Wildcard Placeholder Matching Data Decode Database Toe Any Type Any Type Any Type Ary Type Any Type Number of Filters Auto Sync with Reader Direction Number Either Any Either Any Either Ar Either Ar Either Ar Receive settings from the imager Send settings to the imager or Send and Save settings Note These buttons only affect this view Number of Filters refers to the number of active output filters 0 disables all output filters Any non zero numeral will enable output filtering to be performed using the filter indexes co
320. ut on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Output 2 Appendices lt K801 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt Symbol Quality Output 3 Output 1 Parameters lt K802 Output on Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast Threshold Output on Print Growth Print Growth Threshold Output on Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Output on Unused ECC Unused ECC Threshold gt lt K810 output on output state oulse width output mode gt Output 2 Parameters lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Output 3 Parameters lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Matchcode Matchcode lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Master Symbol Database Size lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Master Symbol lt K231 index master symbol data gt Match Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt Hours Since Reset Read on
321. ut will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the imager is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Diagnostics Service Unit Disabled izabled Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 5 153 I O Parameters Quality Output Quality Qutpuk Duality Output Separator i Decodes Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Output Disabled Quality Output Separator The separator character separates quality output data from symbol data Quality Output Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status Decode Direction Oukput r TF a mm Ty koa m koa m D 4 m Pasi Ro ial DLE AB SY SE FS eE LE Hg I I mI R E hu n CI FE m m m B Click Delete to remove characters Dec
322. vated Output 1 Parameters Qutput On Mismatch or Wo Read Gutput State Normally Open Pulse width S00 QGutput Mode Pulse Pulse Latch Mode 7 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin transitions Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid will output 5 126 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Parameters Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs I
323. ve Database Identifier Output Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default 0 Disabed Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character EZ Button Global Status Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Trigger 3 Unlatch Outputs 4 Parameter Switch Default on Power On Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 51 Serial Commands EZ Button Modes Serial Cmd lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Co
324. ve to Reader to implement the command in the imager The command can be sent without saving or sent and saved simultaneously Receive Reader Settings Send and Save Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Current Menu Settings Default all ESP Settings Advanced Options d QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 2 15 Send Receive Options Send Receive Options To access Receive Save and Default options click the Send Recv button These options can also be reached by right clicking in any of the configuration views ta Send Recy Receiving From the Send Recv menu select Receive Reader Settings Caution Selecting this option will upload the imager s settings If the ESP file has a number of custom settings that must be maintained and downloaded into the imager these settings will be lost This function is useful for receiving uploading the imager s settings and saving them as a file for future use For example if the imager has settings that must not change Receive Reader Settings would load those settings to ESP and save them in an ESP file for later retrieval Receiving the imager s settings will also assure that any unwanted subsequent changes in ESP will not be saved Saving Send No Save lt A gt Saves ESP settings to current memory Receive Reader Settings Save to Reader Send Mo Save Send and Save lt Z gt Default Current Menu Settings 200 ana save Send and
325. vered by this value For example if the number of filters is 5 then filter indexes 1 2 3 4 and 5 will be applied 4 24 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Setup Filter Number This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle This index number should be entered along with the following filter settings for the predetermined symbol position Symbology Type Specifies the symbology type allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Length Specifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index Wildcard This is the character to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison The wildcard character represents the end of matching and allows for variable lengths of symbol output Placeholder The placeholder character requires a character to be present but does not compare the data value Matching Data This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering This data string may also contain wildcard and placeholder characters to facilitate matching Remember that in order to filter or order symbol data it mu
326. ws one trigger to pick up all the symbols Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 100 symbols that can be read in a single read cycle The following conditions apply e Each symbol must be different to be decoded e The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 3 000 for all symbols e All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string unless output filtering is enabled e If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance e If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Multisymbal Number af Symbols 1 Multisymbol Separator i Number of Symbols Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Multisymbal Number of Symbols 1 100 Multisymbol Separator i Multisymbol Separator Multisymbol Separator is used to delimit or separate data fields with a user defined character The Multisymbol Separator can be any valid ASCII character inserted between each symbol read when Number of Symbols is set to any number greater than 1 Multisymbol Number of Symbols 1 Multisymbol Separator eal i SOH STX ETX EOT ENa ACK BEL Bs HT LF vt FF cn _so _s DLe oc1 pc2 DC3 _DC4 NAK
327. xample lt G5 gt will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol 5 In the Master Database tab 1 Select the master symbol index number in which new symbol data will be stored 2 Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index button Masher Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type Read Symbol mto Selected Inder 5 Recewe Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Caution If an index with existing data is selected that data will be overwritten by the new decoded data when this command is used 7 14 QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual Utilities Request New Master Status Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position it is in Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next read Send the lt NEWM gt command from ESP s Terminal The imager returns lt NEWM next master to load gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared and the response will be lt NEWM 0 gt QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual 7 15 Delete Master Symbol Data Master symbol data can be deleted using ESP 1 Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol 2 Click the Master Database tab and double click the symbol number to be deleted 3 Delete text and click OK q Read Rate Counters Device Control Ditterences Master Databaze Firmware Master Symbol Database Size Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index
328. ysical Address 00 0C F1 EC 61 D5 IP Address 162 148 88 35 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 162 148 26 1 i oe DHCP Server 162 148 25 71 Windows did not detect problems with this Lease Obtained 11 3 2008 10 53 03 AM connection If you cannot connect click Lease Expires 2 1 2009 10 53 03 AM Repair DNS Servers 162 148 25 71 162 148 25 70 198 6 1 3 WINS Server 4 A connected QX Hawk s default address information can be verified in ESP by clicking the Search button in the Connection Wizard Compare the imager s IP address to the host s IP address to determine whether or not they are in the same subnet range this can be determined by your I T department if you are unsure TCP IP TCP IP IP Address 162 148 88 IP Address 192 168 0 100 C RS 232 RS 232 Ethemet TCP Port 1 2001 Ethernet TCF Port 1 2001 00 0B 43 05 F4 D4 MODEL Q 830 DESCRIPTION QX 830 for SQE APP 35 338301 10 Sep Sand EIPVID 1095 Q 830 192 168 0 1 onee oree QX Hawk Industrial Imager User s Manual A 77 Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cont 5 To change the host computer s connection settings click Properties on the General tab To change TCP IP settings On the General tab click the Properties button to bring up a list of items being used by the current connection On the Local Area Connection Properties dialog double click Internet Protocol TCP IP L Local Area Conn

QX Hawk Industrial Imager User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents